Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Manx Financial Group

Manx Financial Group

mfx · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker mfx
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry
Employees 201-500
← All annual reports
FY2020 Annual Report · Manx Financial Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
_________________________________ 

ANNUAL REPORT 2020 

PLC 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Welcome to Manx Financial Group PLC 
Integrity through independence and service  

An independent banking group founded in 1935, domiciled in the 
Isle of Man 

Group 

Financial 

Manx 
PLC 
(“Company” or “MFG”) is an AIM-listed 
company 
(LSE:  MFX)  which  has 
subsidiaries  (together  referred  to  as 
“Group”) engaged in a suite of financial 
services based in the Isle of Man and 
the  UK.  These  companies  offer 
financial  services  to  both  retail  and 
commercial 
MFG's 
strategy  is  to  grow  organically  and 
through strategic acquisition to further 
augment the range of services it offers.  

customers. 

Principal wholly owned subsidiaries:  
 Conister Bank Limited 
 Conister Finance & Leasing Ltd 
 Blue Star Business Solutions Limited 
 Edgewater Associates Limited 
 Manx FX Limited 

Blue  Star  Business  Solutions  Limited 
(“BBSL”) is a finance broker providing 
asset finance and commercial loans in 
the UK to the small and medium sized 
enterprises market. 

BBSL  was  acquired  as  part  of  the 
Group’s  strategy 
its 
distribution in the UK broker market. 

increase 

to 

Conister  Finance  &  Leasing  Ltd 
(“CFL”) is a subsidiary of the Bank. It 
is a credit broker providing brokerage 
of  hire  purchase  and  leasing  finance 
facilities in the UK.  

CFL  is  regulated  by  the  Financial 
Conduct  Authority  in  the  UK  and 
registered  as  a  designated  business 
by the Financial Services Authority in 
the Isle of Man. 

Conister  Bank  Limited  (“Bank”)  is  a 
licensed  independent  bank,  regulated 
by  the  Isle  of  Man  Financial  Services 
Authority  (“FSA”),  the  UK’s  Financial 
Conduct Authority and is a full member 
of  the  Isle  of  Man’s  Association  of 
Licensed Banks.  

The  Bank  provides  a  variety  of 
financial  products  and  services, 
including  savings  accounts,  asset 
financing,  personal  loans,  loans  to 
small  and  medium  sized  enterprises, 
block discounting and other specialist 
secured  credit  facilities  to  the  Isle  of 
the  UK  consumer  and 
Man  and 
business sectors. 

Edgewater  Associates  Limited  (“EAL”) 
is  the 
largest  firm  of  Independent 
Financial Advisors (“IFA”) in the Isle of 
Man and is regulated by the FSA.  

Manx FX Limited provides access to 
competitive  foreign  exchange  and 
international  payment  processing 
facilities. 

EAL provides a bespoke and personal 
service to Isle of Man residents and to 
the  Group’s  business  and  personal 
customers  and  advises  on  assets  in 
excess  of  £361  million  (2019:  £324 
million).  

MFX target customers are corporates 
and private clients who have a foreign 
exchange  and  international  payment 
requirement  via 
foreign 
exchange providers. 

its  UK 

 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
Chairman’s Statement 

Business Model and Strategy 

Risk Management 

Corporate Governance Report 

Directors, Officers and Advisers 

Audit, Risk and Compliance Committee 

Directors’ Remuneration Report 

Directors’ Report 

Annual Financial Statements’ Contents 

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 

Independent Auditor’s Report 

Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income 

Company Statement of Profit or Loss and Other Comprehensive Income 

Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 

Company Statement of Financial Position 

Consolidated and Company Statements of Changes in Equity 

Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows 

Company Statement of Cash Flows 

Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements 

4 

7 

9 

15 

19 

21 

24 

26 

27 

28 

29 

35 

37 

38 

39 

40 

42 

44 

43 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT 

Dear Shareholders 

Introduction 
As  reported  in  my  Interim  Statement,  the  Group  was  well 
prepared for the economic downturn caused by Covid-19 and 
Brexit. Our staff have risen magnificently to the challenge and 
I would like to thank them for their teamwork, commitment and 
focus  on  helping  both  their  colleagues  and  our  customers 
through these difficult times.  

During  the  year  we  successfully  agreed  our  long-term  VAT 
dispute with the Isle of Man Customs & Excise regarding the 
unfair recovery rate applied to the Company. We received full 
recovery of our debtor. 

Our  banking subsidiary,  Conister  Bank  Limited  (the  “Bank”), 
quickly  recognised  the  difficulties  that  Covid-19  would  bring 
and, consequently, announced it would set aside £10 million 
to help Isle of Man businesses. Following this, when the Manx 
government  announced  two  business  support  schemes,  the 
Bank  became  the  only  lender  on  the  Island  to  become 
accredited for both – clearly demonstrating our commitment to 
help.  The  Bank  then  became  accredited  through  the  British 
Business Bank for the two UK government business support 
schemes. All four schemes provide an 80 -100% government 
guarantee  against  loss.  These  schemes  together  provided 
much  needed  support  to  companies  both  on-and  off-Island 
and, via these guarantees, afforded a safe lending proposition 
to the Bank.  

In  April  2020,  the  Company  entered  into  a  share  buyback 
agreement  to  purchase  and  cancel  16,966,158  ordinary 
shares in the Company. The positive impact of this transaction 
increased the Net Asset Value per share for all the remaining 
shareholders  by  approximately  15%.  Further,  in  December 
2020, after an absence of 15 years, the Company announced 
the return of a dividend scheme which will allow shareholders 
to either increase their shareholding in the Company at no cost 
or,  alternatively,  to  take  a  cash  dividend.  The  terms  for  the 
2020  dividend  will  be  announced  at  our  forthcoming  Annual 
General Meeting. 

Financial Performance 
At the peak of the first UK lockdown, the Bank had negotiated 
to  help  over  2,000 
forbearance  or  payment  holidays 
customers.  This  figure  was  managed  down  to  only  144  just 
before the UK went into its third lockdown in December. Whilst 
this  demonstrated  the  underlying  quality  of  the  loan  book,  it 
also necessitated an increase in provisions as we continued 
to  prudently  manage  the  balance  sheet.  By  year-end, 
provisions stood at £3.95 million (2019: £1.90 million) with a 
significant  amount  of  the  increase  relating  to  one  customer. 
Consequently, our profit before tax decreased by £1.0 million 
to  £2.0  million  (2019:  £3.0  million),  a  figure  ameliorated  by 
credits totalling £1.3 million relating to our recent acquisitions, 
VAT  recovery  and  treasury  management,  partially  offsetting 
some of the increase in provisions.  

Despite the economic headwinds, lending at the Bank was a 
record £167.2 million (2019: 158.8 million) and our total assets 
increased  by  £15.1  million  to  £268.0  million  (2019:  £252.9 
million), a growth of 6%. Also, this volatility created opportunity 
for Manx FX Limited, our foreign exchange advisory business, 
which  recorded  a  record  profit  of  £1.1  million  (2019:  £0.5 
million) and is well positioned for a strong 2021. 

Our  operating  expenses,  excluding  provisions  and  the  VAT 
credit, decreased by £0.2 million to £11.3 million (2019: £11.5 
million),  reflecting  our  improved  cost  control  which  was 
achieved  without  compromising  lending  growth.  In  turn,  our 
operating income ratio, less provisions and VAT, improved by 
0.5% to 69.1% (2019: 69.6%). 

Our  loyal  Isle of Man  depositors  have  underpinned our  loan 
book growth with deposits increasing by £8.4 million to £218.3 
million  (2019:  £209.9  million)  and  our  loan  to  deposit  ratio 
improved  by  3%  to  89%  (2019:  86%)  –  a  key  measure  in 
demonstrating operational efficiency.  

Following  the  Bank  increasing  its  holding  in  Beer  Swaps 
Limited  to  75%,  we  were  able  to  recognize  a  £2.6  million 
increase in our fixed assets.  

Liabilities increased by £14.9 million to £245.5 million (2019: 
£230.6  million)  driven  mostly  by  an  £8.4  million  increase  in 
deposits to support lending, and a £6.3 million increase in loan 
notes.  The  latter  figure  relates  to  the  share  buy  back  and 
cancellation, together with further loans providing incremental 
regulatory  capital  to  allow  the  Bank  to  continue  to  make 
additional  acquisitions  and  to  increase  lending  to  underpin 
further growth.  

this  economic  environment,  our 

Key objectives 
In 
focus 
continues  to  be  the  protection  of  shareholder  value.  Thus, 
following a recent review, our strategic concentration remains 
to:  

fundamental 

  Provide  the  highest  quality  service  throughout  our 
operations  to  all  customers,  ensuring  that  their 
treatment is both fair and appropriate;  

  Adopt a pro-active strategy of managing risk within a 

structured compliant regime;  

  Concentrate  on  developing  our  core  business  by 
considered  acquisitions, 
increasing  prudential 
lending  and  augmenting  the  range  of  financial 
services we offer;  

  Continue  the  implementation  of  an  enhanced  and 
scalable  IT 
infrastructure  to  better  service  the 
operational requirements of a growing Group without 
the  requirement  for  a  disproportionate  increase  in 
headcount and other associated operational costs;  

  Continue  to  develop  our  Treasury  management  to 
improve  the  return  on  the  liabilities  side  of  our 
balance sheet; and  

  Manage our balance sheet to continue to exceed the 

regulatory requirements for capital adequacy. 

Strategic Report / Risk and Governance 
Immediately following this statement, I detail our approach to 
strategy, and our assessment of risk and our implementation 
of  compliance  and  governance.  In  particular,  I  set  out  our 
perceived risks and how these are managed, together with a 
review of our regulatory requirements and also how we meet 
the obligations of the QCA Code. Rather than reiterate these 
methodologies  at  this  point,  I  would  ask  that  you  take  the 
opportunity  to  review  these  topics  in  conjunction  with  my 
report. 

Page | 4  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT 

Conister Bank Limited  
The Bank finally and successfully resolved its position with the 
Isle  of  Man  Customs  and  Excise  (“C&E”)  with  regards  to  its 
VAT  recovery  rate.  This  has  taken  13  years  and  numerous 
court  cases  for  the  claim,  amounting  to  £1.3  million,  to  be 
settled in our favour. I would like to thank our Executives for 
their perseverance in this matter. Shortly after this claim was 
resolved,  a  second  claim  of  £0.6  million  was  made  to  C&E, 
and I expect to be able to provide an update on its resolution 
at the half-year. 

Having positioned the business for growth in 2019, the 2020 
strategy was impacted by the onset of Covid-19, even though 
the Manx market quickly returned to a near-normal level after 
the initial lockdown, with the Manx loan book growing by £8.4 
million to £54.3 million (2019: £45.9 million). However, our UK 
business  was badly  impacted  by the three  lockdowns  which 
eventually drove the economy into a sharp recession. We re-
positioned UK lending to the more prime sectors, exiting those 
with a higher risk exposure and provided liquidity to markets 
that  had  already  demonstrated  a  level  of  resilience  to  the 
recession.  Whilst  this  move  has  reduced  new  business 
lending, with a consequent £6.1 million decline of the UK loan 
book  to  £35.7  million  (2019:  41.8  million),  the  quality  of  the 
loans now underwritten has improved considerably.  

During  the  year,  the  Bank  acquired  a  controlling  interest  in 
Beer Swaps Limited (trading as Ninkasi), the largest lessor of 
fermenting  vessels  to  the  UK  brewing  industry.  This  move 
takes  the  Bank’s  shareholding  from  20%  to  75%.  The 
investment is already outperforming our expectations and we 
retain an option to acquire a further 15% in the coming months.  

The  Bank  continues  to  attract  deposits  at  historically  low 
market rates which will position it well against any inflationary 
pressure  and  competition.  With  negative 
interest  rates 
experienced in the UK Gilts primary market for the first time, 
our treasury management strategy was to leave our liquidity of 
£31.8  million  (2019:  £13.5  million) 
in  cash  and  cash 
equivalents  for  the  short-term.  Over the  next year,  the  Bank 
intends to utilise this excess liquidity to sustain lending in our 
preferred markets, with a particular focus on the Isle of Man 
commercial market and the UK wholesale market.  

I have discussed over the last few years the need to reduce 
our  dependence  on  overly  expensive  introducers  and  I  am 
pleased  to  report  continued  progress  on  this  project  with 
commissions  paid  reducing  by  36.3%  to  £3.6  million  (2019: 
£5.7 million).  

Personnel expenses increased by £0.4 million as the Bank’s 
headcount  increased  by  seven  as  part  of  the  Beer  Swaps 
Limited  transaction.  Overheads  reduced  by  £0.2  million  to 
£2.9 million (2019: £3.1 million), reflecting various cost-saving 
initiatives  in  the  Bank’s  response  to  the  impact  of  the 
pandemic. With our loan book growth, provisioning increased 
in the year by £2.1 million to £4.0 million (2019: £1.9 million). 
This  increase  in  provisions  reflected  the  deteriorating  credit 
conditions  in  the  UK  as  the  economic  lockdowns  impacted 
Small  and  Medium-Sized  Enterprises.  Depreciation  and 
amortisation  increased  by  £0.2  million  to  £0.5  million  (2019: 
£0.3  million),  driven  by  continued 
IT 
implementation as discussed  in  the 2020 Interim  Statement. 
With  other  costs offsetting  each other,  the  Bank’s  cost base 
increased by £2.5 million to £11.9 million (2019: £9.4 million). 

investment 

in 

Bearing  in  mind  the  economic  backdrop  and  our  prudent 
management of the balance sheet, I am pleased to report the 
£0.7  million  reduction  in  profit  to  £1.9  million  (2019:  £2.6 
million) is less of a contraction than our peers.  

to  £260.2  million 

Total assets, driven by loan book growth, increased by £14.4 
million 
(2019:  £245.7  million),  an 
improvement  of  5.9%.  During  the  year,  we  continued  to 
expand the capital base of the Bank by increasing the issued 
share capital by a further £4.8 million to £15.5 million (2019: 
£10.8 million). Shareholder funds increased by £5.1 million to 
£30.1 million (2019: £25.0 million), a growth of 20.1%. Thus, 
the Bank finished the year in a stronger financial position than 
the start. 

Edgewater Associates Limited (“EAL”)  
Our  independent  financial  advisory  business  remains  the 
largest  on  the  Isle  of  Man  and  had  a  difficult  year  with  the 
trading conditions negatively impacted by Covid-19. Meeting 
clients  became  problematic  and  many  sought  to  delay 
investment decisions due to market  turbulence.  Whilst  a  UK 
economic  recovery  is  expected  later  in  2021,  the  Gross 
Domestic Product fell steeply by 19% in the second quarter of 
2020, which created market uncertainty around the potential 
length of the UK recession. As a result, net income fell by £0.4 
million  in  the  year  to  £2.1  million  (2019:  £2.5  million). 
Operating costs remained constant at £2.1 million, leading to 
a small loss of £0.1 million (2019 profit: £0.2 million).  

Notwithstanding 
the  result,  assets  under  management 
increased  by  11.4%  to  £361  million  (2019:  324  million)  and 
renewal income remained consistent at £1.1 million, indicating 
positive customer satisfaction with portfolio management. The 
growth in assets under management is also a strong indication 
that the renewal income stream will increase in 2021. 

Manx FX Limited (“MFX”)  
Our 
foreign  exchange  advisory  business  has  had  a 
remarkable  year.  Whereas  our  IFA  business  suffered  from 
the 
market  volatility,  MFX  benefitted,  demonstrating 
importance  in  having  a  fully  diversified  financial  services 
group. 

Turnover  increased  to  £1.3  million  (2019:  £0.8  million)  as 
customers moved into safer, stable currencies such as Euros 
and  USD  and  hedged  their  future  exposures.  With  its  cost 
income ratio improving significantly to 17.3% (2019: 39.4%), 
profitability  increased  by  118.3%  to  £1.1  million  (2019:  £0.5 
million)  

The  business  continues  to  have  a  very  liquid  balance  sheet 
and declared an  interim dividend of £0.6 million  for the year 
(2019: £1.1 million). 

Beer Swaps Limited (“BSL”)  
On 28 February 2020, the Bank acquired further shares in BSL 
to  increase  its  ordinary  shareholding  to  75%  for  a  cash 
consideration of £0.7 million. For the period under ownership, 
BSL reported turnover of £0.6 million and a profit before tax of 
£0.2 million with net assets of £0.2 million. BSL is the largest 
tank lessor in the UK brewing market and is developing new 
related products to offer both its existing UK customers and, 
potentially, Europe. 

Page | 5  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT 

Blue Star Business Solutions Limited (“BBSL”)  
In April 2019, the Group acquired 100% of the shares in BBSL 
for a total expected cash consideration of £2.0 million. This UK 
business  complements  the  Bank  as  it  contracts  directly  with 
the end customer as opposed to through an intermediary and 
specialises in markets in which the Bank has little exposure. It 
is worth noting that despite BBSL operating within the same 
negative  trading  environment,  it  originated  £4.1  million  of 
advances  to  the  Bank,  generating  £0.7  million  of  interest 
income  (2019:  £0.6  million)  and  its  introductions  generating 
little to no arrears. This business is a specialist in its market, 
and  this  is  reflected  in  the  quality  of  the  loans  it  introduces.  
BBSL brokered a further £4.0 million of loans to other funders, 
providing a second revenue stream for the business.  

Outlook 
The  Isle  of  Man  has  successfully  bounced  back  from 
lockdowns, as shown by the less than expected uptake in the 
government support schemes, our positive lending figures and 
the encouraging recent government budget. As such, I expect 
a continued improvement in the economy on Island which will, 
in  turn,  create  a  positive  environment  for  our  lending  and 
wealth management businesses to operate within. 

The  early signs show  a  sustained  recovery  is  within  the  UK 
government’s  grasp,  assuming  infection  rates  continue  to 
decrease  and  the  well-managed  roll-out  of  its  vaccination 
strategy continues. However, there will be numerous sectors 
of  the  economy  which  will  continue  to  require  sustained 
government  support.  The  Bank  has  been  monitoring  sector 
performance  and  will  apply  its  liquidity  to  those  sectors  that 
have  proved more resilient to the pandemic and are  aligned 
with its longer-term  growth strategy.  The careful selection  of 
markets  and  the  continued  lending  through  the  government 
support  schemes  should  create  an  excellent  opportunity  for 
growing our loan book.  

We continue to consider new sources of liquidity both on and 
off Island. Indeed,  the Bank launched a successful series of 
notice accounts deposit products on Island in 2020 and it will 
progress accessing new sources of liquidity in the UK in the 
coming  year  to  ensure  it  has  a  sustainable  base  in  each 
jurisdiction. 

I believe that we have proved that our diversity continues to be 
our strength. Our organic growth strategy for the Bank is well 
developed  and  we  will  also  take  this  time  of  turbulence  to 
consider further investments to gain footholds or to increase 
our  market  share  in  identified  strategic  sectors.  Our  cash 
reserves  are  considerable,  and  the  Bank  now  enjoys  the 
highest prudential ratios held over the last 10 years. In short, 
each of our operations is well poised to take advantage of any 
economic upturn during 2021 and beyond. 

Once again, I would like to thank my fellow Board members, 
the  Group’s  executive  team  and  staff  for  their  continued 
contribution to our ongoing business. I would also like to thank 
our shareholders and customers for their continued support. 

Jim Mellon 
Executive Chairman 
3 March 2021

Page | 6  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

BUSINESS MODEL AND STRATEGY 

Conister Bank Limited (“Bank”) 
The  Bank’s  Board  of  Directors  (“Bank’s  Board”)  has  set 
strategic  objectives,  aligned  to  its  strategic  plan.  These 
objectives  provide  the  framework  for  setting  risk  appetite 
statements and tolerances for all material risks. The strategic 
objectives set are: 

  Maintain capital adequacy; 
  Deliver stable earnings growth; 
  Secure  stable  and  efficient  access  to  funding  and 

liquidity; and 

  Maintain stakeholder confidence. 

These strategic objectives provide the link between the Bank’s 
strategic planning and its risk management framework, using 
risk appetite statements, measures and tolerances to manage 
risk  on  a  day-to-day  basis  and  are  reviewed  annually  and 
approved by the Bank’s Board. Key in considering the Bank’s 
judgement  of  appetites  is  its  assessment  of  its  regulatory 
environment  (both  in the  Isle of  Man (“IOM”) and the United 
Kingdom (“UK”); the IOM deposit market; access to regulatory 
capital;  the  IOM  and  UK  credit  markets;  the  suitability  of  its 
product  range;  concentrations  of  advances  and  historic 
arrears. The aim is to deliver controlled growth, by providing 
adequate returns with strong credit profiles.  

Having  considered  the  above  in  light  of  the  COVID-19 
pandemic  and  Brexit,  drawing  on  both  internal  and  external 
resources, the Bank continues to believe the credit markets it 
operates will deliver growth with liquidity sourced from both its 
Balance Sheet and  the  IOM’s substantial deposit base.  This 
growth  will  be  achieved  through  the  expansion  of  existing 
products  organically,  including  participating  in  IOM  and  UK 
through 
government  business  support  schemes  and 
acquisition.  This  strategy  can  be  analysed  by  the  two 
geographical areas the Bank operates within, namely the IOM 
and the UK. 

The Bank is proud of its heritage and remains heavily centric 
in  the  IOM  but  recognised  that  as  its  UK  loan  book  grows  it 
would need to create a UK presence to manage and grow this 
aspect of its business. 

Sourcing  reliable  funding  underpins  the  Bank’s  growth 
objectives.  The  Bank’s  strategy  in  this  area  is  to  secure  a 
diversified, low cost suite of liquidity alternatives for the Bank 
to draw upon in order to support its lending strategy. The IOM 
deposit market remains a key source of liquidity through the 
fixed deposit products and new notice account products which 
were  launched  in  2019.  The  Bank  has  penetrated  less  than 
1% of the retail segment available and has not established a 
meaningful  presence  in  the  £11  billion  corporate  and  trust 
service provider market segment. This provides an opportunity 
to promote products other than fixed-term and notice accounts 
to attract new deposits. 

The  Bank  recognises  it  has  an  opportunity  to  increase  its 
market  share  as  a  result  of  the  reduction  in  competition 
experienced in this market and/or by increasing interest rates. 
As  such,  the  Bank  believes  that  it  has  sufficient  reliable 
alternatives  to  be  confident  that  it  can  raise  the  necessary 
deposits when required.  

The  Bank’s  acquisition  strategy  is  to  gain  market  share  in 
markets  it  already  operates  within  or  to  gain  access  to  a 

desirable  market  through  an  existing  reputable,  profitable 
operator.  

Regarding the former, the Bank continues to enjoy a positive 
lending  experience  within  the  UK  credit  broker  market  and 
currently has circa £42.5 million of net loans outstanding.  The 
strategy  for  growth  is  both  organic  (through  improving 
customer service and increasing the number of brokers on its 
roster) and acquisitive.  The Bank acquired BBSL in 2019 and 
Beer  Swaps  Limited  (“BSL”)  in  2020,  both  established 
businesses with the view of expanding its offering. 

Edgewater Associates Limited (“EAL”) 
EAL is the largest IFA firm in the IOM and is regulated by the 
Isle of Man Financial Services Authority (“FSA”). Its strategic 
objective is to: 

  Grow and service its client base; 
 
Increase assets under advice; and 
  Grow and develop its staff complement. 

EAL is a generalist IFA practice with a diverse mix of clients 
requiring a broad range of products and services covering: 

  First time buyers   ---   mortgages; 
  Newly  qualified  professionals      ---      protection, 

savings, school fees; 

  Established  clients      ---      wealth  management, 

retirement planning; and 

  General  insurance  clients      ---      home,  travel, 

commercial and specialist. 

In  2016  EAL  embarked  on  an  aggressive  and  successful 
acquisition  programme  covering  a  two  year  period;  at  the 
outset it had a client base of approximately 4,600 clients. After 
four  acquisitions  and  an  active  data  cleansing  review,  EAL 
now  has  an  active  client  base  of  approximately  9,600,  with 
associated  assets  under  advice  of  £361 million  (2019:  £324 
million). 

Whilst  EAL  will  continue  to  grow  and  develop  its  standard 
business model, it will always be open to new opportunities. It 
remains  nimble  and  ready  to  move  with  economic  and 
regulatory changes as they arise; its team remains up-to-date 
against  industry standards  and  trends.  It  retains  an  appetite 
for growth  either  through  additional  acquisition  opportunities 
that may arise, or via organic growth from its existing clients 
and  business  partners  with  whom 
it  has  built  strong 
relationships. 

Diversification  opportunities  are  also  encouraged  and 
pursued,  as  per  its  successful  programme  to  grow  or  build 
Employee  Benefit  Group  Schemes.  This  incorporates  staff 
pensions  (including  pension  freedom),  protection,  private 
medical cover, and death in service. 

To  keep  pace  with  its  development  it  will  continue  to  train 
talented people to progress to rounded, professional advisers 
who  are  able to  fit  into  succession  planning.  To supplement 
this, it also takes the opportunity to recruit quality experienced 
advisers and para-planners who can further enhance its team. 

Page | 7  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STRATEGIC REPORT 

BUSINESS MODEL AND STRATEGY 

Manx FX Limited (“MFX”) 
The strategic objectives of MFX are: 

  To be the first choice for international payments and 

foreign exchange; 

  To  maintain,  develop  and  strengthen  existing 

relationships; and 

  To  increase  the  number of  referrals  to  their  foreign 
exchange  business  partners  with  a  view  of 
onboarding new accounts. 

MFX target customers are corporates and private clients who 
have  a 
international  payment 
requirement via its UK foreign exchange providers. 

foreign  exchange  and 

The IOM offers a diversified range of industries and sectors. 
For  the  next  12  months  MFX  will  concentrate  its  efforts  in 
pursuing local new business opportunities.  

MFX  has  the  ability  to  negotiate  upfront  agreed  foreign 
exchange  margins  and  applies  price  transparency  which 
underpins  the  professional  relationship  they  provide.  The 
international payment fees offer competitive value, at reduced 
rates compared with local high street banks.

Page | 8  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

Risk management overview 
Effective risk management is crucial to MFG’s sustainability. 
is  ultimately 
The  MFG’s  Board  of  Directors  (“Board”) 
accountable for the effective governance of risk management. 
The Board maintains its oversight and responsibilities in terms 
of  the  three  lines  of  defence  risk  governance  model  set  out 
below.  

Determining the Group’s  risk tolerance and appetite through 
enterprise  risk  management  is  a  key  element  of  MFG’s 
corporate governance framework.  It is primarily designed to 
assist  the  Group  in  enhancing  its  corporate  governance 
framework  and  intended  to  reinforce  the  key  elements  of 
widely  accepted  and  long-established  Quoted  Companies 
Alliance (“QCA”) corporate governance principles.   

A fundamental principle contained in the code, is for effective 
risk  management:  MFG  has  in  place  a  Risk  Management 
Framework (“RMF”) to support the implementation of some of 
the  principles  of 
the  MFG  Governance  Framework  at 
subsidiary  level.  The  RMF  supports  the  Board  and  senior 
management  in  fulfilling  their  respective  duties  in  relation  to 
the  sustainable  operation  of 
risk 
management system is supported by policies, processes and 
activities relating to the taking, management and reporting of 
risk. 

the  business.  The 

Management and accountability 
The  Audit,  Risk  and  Compliance  Committee  (“ARCC”)  is 
operated  at  a  Group  level  and  currently  comprises  of  three 
experienced  Non-executive  Directors  who  are  qualified 
accountants.  Only  members  of  the  ARCC  have  the  right  to 
attend ARCC meetings to allow for independence. However, 
other  individuals  representing  Executive  Management,  Risk, 
Compliance and Internal Audit are invited by the Chairman of 
the  ARCC  to  attend  all  or  part  of  any  meeting as  and  when 
appropriate. 

The main objectives of the ARCC are to review operations and 
ensure  that  they  are  conducted  to  the  highest  possible 
standards. This is accomplished by providing an independent 
objective assurance function specifically for, but not limited to: 
Internal  Controls  and  Risk  Management  Systems; 
Whistleblowing  and  Fraud;  Risk  and  Compliance;  Internal 
Audit and External Audit. 

It  provides  oversight  of  compliance  with  all  legislation, 
regulation and applicable codes of practice in the jurisdictions 
that  MFG  conducts  business;  and 
reviews  policies, 
procedures and processes to effectively identify, quantify and 
manage all material risks and to advise on best practice. 

All  individuals  are  trained  to  understand  the  importance  of 
effective  risk  management  and  ensure  that  risks  associated 
with  their  role  are  appropriately  understood,  managed  and 
reported.  Individuals  at  all  levels  communicate  risk  related 
insights in a timely, transparent and honest manner. 

This culture is driven from the top by the Board and Executive 
Management through how they communicate, make decisions 
and motivate the business. Managers and leaders ensure that 
in  all  their  actions  and  behaviours  they  continually  reinforce 
the culture that the effective management of risk is critical to 
MFG’s  success  and  that  every  individual  plays  a  role  in  the 
management of risk. 

RMF - Appetite 
Risk appetites are currently only set at subsidiary level and set 
out the maximum amount of risk that it is prepared to accept 
in  the  pursuit  of  delivering  on  business  objectives.  The  risk 
appetite considers all the risks detailed under “Principal risks”  
on  page  12  and  is  reviewed  annually,  and  as  the  operating 
environment changes, it is constantly measured against stated 
appetite to take appropriate action.   

RMF - Risk identification, measurement and control 
Having  a  robust  understanding  of  the  risks  to  which  the 
business is exposed is crucial to ensure that all material risks 
are appropriately monitored, managed and reported on. Each 
individual within the Group in conjunction with their manager 
is responsible for understanding the risks associated with their 
role.  An  understanding  of  risk  is  developed  through  the 
identification, 
appropriate, 
measurement of risks to which the business is exposed.  

and,  where 

assessment 

These  processes  are  performed  as  part  of  strategy  setting, 
strategy execution and day-to-day operations and are referred 
to as  risk and control  assessments. The Risk team provides 
tools  to  aid  managers  and  individuals  in  developing  an 
understanding  of  risk  within 
their  respective  business 
responsibilities. 

The  risk  and  control  assessment  process  of  understanding 
risk and reviewing the adequacy and effectiveness of related 
controls and risk mitigation approaches is generally performed 
on  a  regular  basis, at  least  annually,  and  is  reported to  and 
governed by: 

  A high level risk assessment to identify the top risks 
enabling work to progress in a risk focused manner 
on completing risk and control assessments, in order 
to build a key controls monitoring programme; 

RMF 
The  following  overview  of  the  key  governance  components 
that  make  up  the  MFG  system  of  governance  illustrates  the 
crucial role of the RMF:  

  Management Committees, including a review of roles 
and  responsibilities  to  ensure  that  all material  risks 
are  captured  and  formally  considered  prior  to 
presentation to the ARCC and the Board; 

RMF - Culture 
The  risk  culture,  which  forms  part  of  MFG’s  overall  culture, 
encompasses the tone at the top of the organisation and a set 
of  shared  attitudes,  values,  behaviours  and  practices  that 
characterise how individuals at MFG consider risk in their day-
to-day business activities. Learnings are taken from previous 
incidents  and  ongoing  assessment  to  ensure  continuous 
improvement in the management of risk.  

  Policies  within  the  policy  framework  to  ensure  that 
the relevant Management Committee is accountable 
for the policies that support their risk, and to reduce 
the workload for the ARCC and the Board, enabling 
them  to  focus  on  overseeing  and  challenging  the 
RMF; 

Page | 9  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

  Board  approved  risk  appetite  statements,  and  the 
design  of  an  underlying  risk  appetite  measures 
framework,  to  be  owned  and  monitored  by  the 
relevant Management Committee; 

RMF - Three lines of defence and key assurance functions  
As  part  of  its  overall  RMF,  MFG  has  adopted  best  practice 
monitoring and control mechanisms by implementing the three 
lines of defence governance and combined assurance model. 
This means that responsibility for governance and oversight is 
allocated  throughout  the  organisation  according  to the  three 
lines of defence principles.   

The three lines of defence governance model is regarded as 
international  best  practice  for  ensuring  good  governance 
(including  governance  within  risk  and  capital  management) 
across an organisation. The emphasis is placed on ownership, 
responsibility, 
independence,  assurance,  communication, 
oversight and transparency across MFG’s governance.  

The  term  ‘key  assurance  function’  refers  to  a  properly 
authorised function,  whether  in  the  form of  a  person,  unit  or 
department,  serving  as  a  control  or  ‘checks  and  balances’ 
function from a governance perspective, and which carries out 
such activities.  These functions typically are second and third 
line of defence functions.  

First line of defence  
The first line of defence e.g. business management is primarily 
accountable 
risk  origination  and 
management in accordance with risk policy and strategy. This 
includes 
implementing 
responses.    

identifying,  assessing  risks  and 

the  day-to-day 

for 

Second line of defence  
The second line of defence is responsible for the development 
and maintenance of the frameworks and policies. The second 
line  provides  oversight  of,  and  challenge  to,  the  first  line  of 
defence and drives the implementation of the frameworks and 
policies. 

Third line of defence  
The  third  line  of  defence  is  the  independent  assurance 
function  providing  overall  assurance 
the  Board  on 
governance, risk management, and internal controls. The third 
line of defence comprises of internal audit, external audit and 
other  independent  assurance  providers.    The  third  line  of 
defence is completely independent from the management of 
the day-to-day business activities. 

to 

RMF - MFG assurance functions  
MFG has effective systems of risk management and internal 
control.  The  tasks,  processes  and  obligations  of  the  key 
assurance functions are transparent and clearly defined, with 
regular exchange of information between the functions. Each 
of  the  functions is structured to ensure  that  the  function has 
the necessary authority, independence, resources, expertise 
and  access  to  the  Board  and  all  relevant  employees  and 
information to exercise its authority.  The minimum assurance 
functions within MFG include:  

  Risk management function;   
  Compliance function; and 
 
Internal Audit function.  

The  departmental  head  of  each  of  these  key  functions 
possesses  the  necessary  skills,  experience  and  knowledge 
required for the specific positions they exercise, and meet all 
suitability and ‘fit and proper’ requirements. Written guidelines 
for these functions are in place, and compliance with them is 
assured on a regular basis.  All of the key functions within MFG 
have a direct reporting line to the ARCC and Board.  

MFG  has  developed  a  combined  assurance  model  to 
effectively  manage  the  organisation’s  significant  risks  and 
material  matters  through  a  combination  of  the  assurance 
service providers and functions described above. 

RMF  -  Internal  Capital  Adequacy  Assessment  Process 
(“ICAAP”) 
Overview 
ICAAP  is  a  key  strategic  and  risk  management  tool  for  the 
Bank.  It  is  a  key component of  the  Bank’s  planning  process 
during the short and medium-term. The Bank’s lead regulator, 
the  FSA,  requires  the  Bank  to  establish  and  maintain  an 
ongoing  internal  adequacy  assessment  process  which  is 
appropriate to the nature and scale of its business and review 
that process annually and evidence that review. 

Methodology 
The Bank’s ICAAP process is as follows: 

Formulation of the Bank’s strategy and budget  
Strategic  plans  are  prepared  annually  for  the  forthcoming 
year, which will consider the Bank’s risk appetite, key market 
sectors to target, products to leverage/introduce, headcount, 
operational and capital investment required. 

Risk assessment 
The Executive Team will liaise with the Risk and Compliance 
department to determine the material risks in the Bank based 
on  incidents  and  breaches,  Internal  Audit  reports,  Risk  and 
Compliance report findings and issues raised at the Board and 
Committee meetings. 

Page | 10  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

Stress testing and reverse stress testing 
The  Finance  department  use  Bank  of  England  market 
assumptions  for  stress  testing  and  stress  the  five-year 
forecasts  to  identify  any  capital  deficiencies.  Reverse  stress 
testing  is  also  used  based  on  the  assumption that  the  Bank 
ceases to trade, coupled with a run-off scenario to determine 
the capital distribution.  

Reverse stress testing is used to explore the vulnerabilities of 
the Bank’s strategy and plans to extreme adverse events that 
would  cause  the  business  to  fail  in  order  to  facilitate 
contingency planning. 

Calculation of capital requirement and buffers 
Following the setting of strategy, risk assessment and stress 
tests, the Bank will then calculate its capital requirements by 
considering the following areas: 

  Pillar  I  –  The  calculation  is  based  on  the  minimum 
regulatory requirement under Pillar I of 10.0% of risk 
weighted assets for material risks; 

  Pillar II – Assessment of any additional business risks 
not covered by the minimum Pillar I requirement, plus 
an  assessment  of  Pillar  II  risks  based  upon  the 
current material risk assessment and stress tests, to 
determine whether any additional capital buffers are 
deemed appropriate; 

  Pillar  III  –  Pillar  III  establishes  measures  to  make 
better use of market discipline. Pillar III applies only 
at the top consolidated level of a banking group and 
is therefore generally not considered to be applicable 
to  IOM  incorporated  banks  as  per  FSA  ICAAP 
guidance; and  

  Buffers – The Bank assesses its position to industry 
standard  for  regulatory  buffers  and  calculates  its 
position  based  on  its  overall  exposures  to  different 
jurisdictions. 

Review, challenge and adoption of the ICAAP 
The  ICAAP  is  prepared  by  the  Finance  department  in 
conjunction  with  the  Risk  and  Compliance  department,  and 
reviewed  by  the  Bank’s  Executive  Team,  Risk  Management 
Committee, the ARCC, Internal Audit and the External Auditor 
prior to approval by the Bank’s Board. It is used to measure 
and benchmark the Bank’s risk appetite and to forecast capital 
usage under both stressed and normal conditions. The ICAAP 
is challenged at all stages of the review process and presented 
to the Bank’s Board by the ARCC for approval prior to being 
submitted  to  the  FSA.  The  ICAAP  is  regularly  reviewed  and 
updated throughout the year by management and referred to 
the ARCC and the Bank’s Board. 

ICAAP Results 
The  Bank  has  completed  its  ICAAP  testing  for  2020  in 
compliance with regulatory requirements. Despite the severity 
of the risk scenarios modelled, the Bank satisfied the capital 
and leverage requirements for the purpose of the stress test.  

Page | 11  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

Principal risks 
As a result of the RMF, identified on pages 9 to 11, the Group 
has exposure to the following key risks: 

  Strategic; 
  Credit risk including counterparty credit;  
  Operational risk including regulatory; 
  Conduct; 
  Liquidity; 
 
Interest rate; 
  Regulatory; and 
  Reputation. 

The  Group  has  considered  the  above  key  risks  that  it  faces 
and the mitigating controls against those risks: 

Strategic risk 
Strategic risk is the risk to the Group’s revenue as set within 
the  budget  and  the  medium-term  plans  arising  through  sub-
optimal  implementation  of  the  strategic  plan  due  to  either 
internal or external factors faced by its subsidiaries. 

Controls and mitigation 
The  Group  controls  and  mitigates  this  risk  via  a  number  of 
measures: 

  Subsidiaries  generally  commence 

formal 
planning  process  in  September  for  the  forthcoming 
year,  to  inform  the  budget  submitted  to  the  Boards 
throughout  the  Group  for  approval.  In  reality,  the 
planning  process  is  continuous  and  responsive  to 
change in the internal and external environment. 

their 

  Barriers to delivering the strategic plan, and changes 
to  planned  activity  are  captured  in  the  various 
subsidiary  ‘Managing  Director’s  Reports’  which  are 
submitted  to  their  respective  Boards  and  then 
ultimately reported to the Group Board at each Board 
meeting. The reports will take account of input from 
the Group Executive Directors and current financial 
performance  versus  budget  and  seek  to  highlight 
strategic responses for the related subsidiary. 

  Key  strategic  projects  are  managed  under  formal 
project  governance  with  progress  of  key  projects 
tracked, and communicated and discussed at regular 
project meetings. 

  The  impact  of  limited  capital,  liquidity,  operational 
capacity and regulator restriction on the achievement 
of strategy is captured by the planning process, with 
exceptional items  dealt  with under  the  relevant  risk 
category,  where  the  impact  on  risk  appetite  and 
mitigating actions will be formally recorded.  

Credit risk including counterparty credit risk 
Credit risk is defined as the risk that counterparties fail to fulfil 
their  contractual  obligations.  A  material  decline  in  credit 
quality, or the  failure  of a counterparty could result  in higher 
levels  of  arrears  and  ultimately  in  increased  provisions  and 
write-offs, which impacts upon profitability, potentially eroding 
the capital position for the Group’s subsidiaries.  

Controls and mitigation 

  Delegated  authorities:  The  Group  operates  to  a 
schedule  of  delegated  authorisation  limits  linked  to 

individual 

underwriter’s 

an 
and 
experience.  This  is  bolstered  by  validations  of  all 
significant  credit  exposures  over  set  limits  and 
ongoing  monitoring  of  credit  positions  of  key 
suppliers and intermediary networks. 

knowledge 

  Distribution  strategy:  The  Group  actively  monitors 
and controls the credit risk of all business written to 
ensure  that  it  is  treating  customers  fairly  and  as  a 
safeguard  against  the  failure  of  any  business 
relationship.  Mitigation  of  counterparty  credit  risk  is 
undertaken 
the  maintenance,  where 
appropriate, of cash reserves and loss pools to fund 
indemnity.  Comprehensive  due 
any  buy-back 
diligence processes are also undertaken.  

through 

  Monitoring  of  credit  quality  exposure:  The  Group 
monitors  its  credit  risk  exposures  via  an  internal 
credit  risk  grading  methodology  that  assigns  each 
individual  exposure  with  one  of  three  credit  grades 
based upon the probability of default at product and 
distribution  channel  level.  This  allows  for  better 
monitoring  of  credit  quality  and  impairment  of  its 
current book as well as forecast and stress test on a 
more accurate basis.  

  Concentration 

of 

the 
risk:  To  protect  against 
exposures  where 
build-up 
unintentional 
the 
impact 
could  materially 
deterioration 
sustainability  and  profitability,  the  Group  seeks  to 
maintain  a  diverse  portfolio  of  products  across  a 
variety  of  geographical  regions,  customers,  sectors 
and asset classes. This diversity protects the Group 
against any deterioration in a particular geographical 
region, 
the  economic  environment,  commercial 
sector etc.  

  Accounting  standards:  Finally,  the  introduction  of 
Instruments,  provides  an 

IFRS  9 
additional credit risk buffer.  

–  Financial 

Operational risk including regulatory risks 
Operational risk is the risk of loss resulting from human error, 
inadequate  or  failed  internal  processes  or  controls,  system 
failure, improper conduct, fraud or external events. 

The  principal  operational  risks  for  the  Group  arise  from  the 
following areas: 

  Resilience of the IT environment: The IT environment 
is  under  constant  review  to  identify  and  implement 
efficiencies  to  enable  increased  customer  service 
through  the  provision  of  additional  services  and 
products  and  to  automate  manual  tasks  wherever 
possible  to  minimise  the  potential  for  human  error. 
The  Group’s  IT  Steering  Committee  reviews  and 
monitors  current  service  standards,  highlight  any 
deficiencies  and  mitigate  accordingly.  There  are  a 
number of exception reports and scheduled tasks on 
a  daily  basis  to  ensure  that  any  controls  within 
systems are being reported on adequately. 

  Third  Party  administration  services:  The  key 
operational controls ensure that partners are fulfilling 
their legal and  regulatory obligations in accordance 
with  their  service-level  agreement  with  the  Group.  

Page | 12  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

The  Group  has  an  outsourcing  policy  to  ensure 
obligations are monitored and met. Internal reviews 
and  audits  are  conducted  on  counterparties  to 
ensure terms agreed are being adhered to.  

Controls and mitigation 

  Adherence to internal limits and approval processes 

through:  

o  Delegated authorities: The Group operates 
to  a  schedule  of  delegated  credit 
authorisation  limits  and  payment  approval 
limits,  linked  to  an  individual’s  knowledge 
and experience.  

o  Segregation of duties: There is appropriate 
segregation  between 
those  authorising 
transactions and those executing them, with 
four  eyes  principals 
in  place  where 
required. 
o  Exception 

reporting 
reporting:  Daily 
ensures  that  any  regulatory  and  internal 
limits  are 
the 
appropriate Management team. 

regularly  by 

reviewed 

o  New Business approval policy: All material 
new  business  is  approved  in  line  with  a 
formally  approved  policy,  with  ultimate 
decision making resting with the applicable 
Executive Committee. 

  Change  control:  The  Group  ensures  that  both, 
changes to existing products and services and new 
products and services, are delivered in a controlled 
manner with the appropriate checks and controls in 
place.   

  Onboarding: A comprehensive on-boarding process 
in place for new outsourced partners in the UK. 

  Due diligence checks: The operational risk from the 
Group’s  third  party  administrators  is  mitigated  by  a 
comprehensive  due  diligence  process  which 
includes a take-on due diligence and a full review of 
the  partner’s  policies,  procedures  and  financial 
stability.  

  Key  Operational  Controls:  Key  controls  are 
monitored  through  a  combination  of  management 
oversight,  Risk  and  Compliance  monitoring  and 
Internal Audit reviews.  

  New  Business  Policy  and  Process:  New  business 
and material business change is outlined in a formal 
policy,  which 
that  a  sequence  of 
assessment  and  approval  is  followed.  This  will 
ensure that all relevant input is included and material 
risks considered.  

requires 

  Exception  reports:  Exception  reporting  allows  the 
Group  to  identify  weaknesses  in  processes  and 
controls  which  in  turn  allows  for  adequate  training 
and the bolstering of systems and processes. 

Conduct risk 
The Group is exposed to conduct risk through its operations 
and  interactions  with  consumers,  either  directly  or  through 
third parties (brokers, or counter-parties).   The risk exposure 
is  regulatory  in  nature  for  the  Group’s  UK  based  operations 
and consideration of any local jurisdiction guidance on good 
practice. 

Controls and mitigation 
The Group has an outsourcing policy to ensure that adherence 
to  conduct  and  regulatory  standards  is  contracted,  and 
compliance with standards is appropriately monitored through 
the  collection  and  assessment  of  relevant  data,  partner 
attestation, and onsite audits where appropriate.  

General  conduct  and  particularly  Treating  Customers  Fairly 
(“TCF”) principles are applied across the Group’s activities.  

Liquidity risk 
Financial institutions are subject to liquidity risk as an inherent 
part of their business. Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group 
may not hold sufficient liquid funds meaning it would be unable 
to meet its contractual liabilities as they fall due.  

Liquidity risk arises where the Group, through its subsidiaries, 
has  contractual  credit  obligations  that  can  be  placed  under 
stress  during 
illiquidity.  The  Group  generally 
accesses wholesale funding markets or builds a core portfolio 
of liquid assets or buffers as additional sources of liquidity that 
can be utilised during such times.  

times  of 

Controls and mitigation 
Overall, the Group’s liquidity profile is resistant to stress as the 
Group: 

  Has  a  positively  matched  funding  profile  and  does 
not engage in maturity transformation which means 
that on a cumulative mismatch position the Group is 
forecast  to be  able to meet all liabilities  as they fall 
due;  

  Maintains an adequate liquidity buffer; and 

  Has no exposure to the interbank lending market.  

The  Group’s  liquidity  position  is  monitored  on  a  daily  basis 
against  internal  and  external  agreed  limits.  The  Group  also 
has a Liquidity Contingency Policy and Liquidity Contingency 
Committee  should  a  liquidity  crisis  or  potential  liquidity 
disruption event occur.  

Interest rate risk 
The  principal  potential  interest  rate  risk  that  the  Group  is 
exposed  to  is  the  risk  that  the  fixed  interest  rate  and  term 
profile  of  its  deposit  base  differs  materially  from  the  fixed 
interest  rate  and  term  profile  of  its  asset  base,  or  basis  and 
term structure risk.  

Controls and mitigation 

  Funding profile: Interest rate risk for the Group is not 
deemed to be material currently due to the Group’s 
positively matched funding profile. In a rising interest 
rate  environment,  due  to  the  nature  of  the  Group’s 
products  and  its  matched  funded  profile,  it  should 

Page | 13  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

RISK MANAGEMENT 

theoretically  be  able  to  change  its  lending  rate  to 
match any corresponding change in its cost of funds.  

risk is compounded due to the size of the Group, and the need 
to maintain a manageable cost of compliance. 

  The  Group  attempts  to  efficiently  match  its  deposit 

taking to its funding requirements.  

  The maturity profile of the Group’s loan book through 
staged repayments means interest risk is difficult to 
hedge  effectively  so  the  Group  does  not  currently 
hedge against this risk, and is therefore not exposed 
to  any  additional  market  interest  rate  risk  in  this 
respect. 

  Funding  cost:  The  Group  would  be  exposed  to 
potential risk if its cost of funds, which is linked to the 
cost of retail deposits, and ultimately the UK banks’ 
base rate, was to increase and it was unable, due to 
a  competitive  lending  environment,  to  raise  its 
lending rate correspondingly. The Group’s three year 
plan allows for an increase in its cost of funds, but the 
Group  accepts  that  these  assumptions  may  not 
reflect  the  timing  of  any  interest  rate  rise  or  the 
quantum of any increase.  

Regulatory risk 
Regulatory risk is the risk of material breach of regulation.  

The Group holds a Class 1 (1) Banking Licence in the IOM and 
is  accordingly  regulated  by  the  Financial  Services  Authority 
(“FSA”).  The  Group  also  holds  permissions  with  the  UK’s 
Financial  Conduct  Authority  (“FCA”)  pertaining  to  regulated 
credit  activities,  and  other  specified  regulated  products  and 
services in the UK. 

The  risk  of  regulatory  breach  arises  through  a  failure  to 
identify, assess and apply applicable regulation; or a failure to 
adhere to the applicable regulation as applied. 

Monitoring  and  complying  with  the  requirements  of  existing 
regulation across numerous regulatory bodies, along with the 
rapid pace and volume of regulatory change is a key risk. The 

Controls and mitigation 
The  Group  remains  well  placed  to  meet  the  regulatory 
challenges that bring change to the macro environment.  

Regulatory risks continue to be mitigated by themed and ad-
hoc compliance monitoring reviews which are driven using a 
risk-based approach to ensure resource is directed to areas of 
potential  material  risk.  The  monitoring  plan  is  approve 
annually by the ARCC. Monitoring reviews are supplemented 
by ongoing staff training and guidance. 

Wherever  possible,  legislative  and  regulatory  requirements 
are built into relevant administration systems, with appropriate 
monitoring  and  exception  reporting  processes  in  place  to 
monitor compliance. 

The  Group  maintains  a  watching  brief  on  the  regulatory 
environment and, as active members of a number of IOM and 
UK trade bodies, it receives additional regulatory updates and 
guidance  on  proposed  legislative  and  regulatory  issues. 
Upstream  regulatory  changes  are  tracked  and  assessed  for 
impact  by  the  Compliance  Department  and  material  items 
reported to the ARCC. 

Reputation risk 
Reputation  risk is the  risk  of  loss  resulting  from damages to 
the Group’s reputation, in lost revenue or increased costs; or 
destruction of shareholder value. 

Controls and mitigation 
The Group mitigates this risk by ensuring that its key risks are 
identified  and  managed,  with  an  impact  assessment  of  any 
potential  or  actual  issues  considering  the  impact  to  the 
Group’s reputation. The Group actively seeks to minimise the 
occurrence of events or issues which could give rise to loss or 
negative  feedback, and actively  manages  the  impact  should 
issues occur.  

Page | 14  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

Corporate governance report  
The  Board  is  committed  to  best  practice  in  corporate 
governance.  Directors  have  agreed  to  comply  with  the 
provisions  of 
the  Quoted  Companies  Alliance  (“QCA”) 
Corporate Governance Code for Small and Mid-Size Quoted 
Companies to the extent which is appropriate to its nature and 
scale  of  operations.  This  report  illustrates  how  the  Group 
complies with those principles. 

QCA  Principle  1:  Establish  a  strategy  and  business  model 
which promote long-term value for shareholders 
The immediate strategy and business operations of the Group 
are set out in the Strategic Report. 

The  Group’s strategy  and business model and amendments 
thereto, are developed by the Chief Executive Officer (“CEO”) 
and his senior management team, and approved by the Board. 
The  management  team,  led  by  the  CEO,  is  responsible  for 
implementing the strategy and managing  the business at an 
operational level.  

The  Group’s  overall strategic  objective  is  to  capitalise on  its 
unique position as owning the only independent Bank within 
the  British  Crown  Dependencies  by  developing  core 
businesses  within 
financial  services  sector,  both 
organically and by considered acquisitions. 

the 

The  Group  has  a  balanced  portfolio  of  regulated  and 
unregulated  operations,  all of which  are  managed on  a  risk-
based  and  prudential  approach.  The  principal  activities 
include: deposit taking; lending to consumer and commercial 
markets  in  the  IOM  and  the  UK;  the  provision  of  dedicated 
financial  advice,  especially  in  the  areas  of  pensions  and 
foreign  currency  and  payment 
general 
services. 

insurance;  and 

The Group’s investor relations activities encompass dialogue 
with both institutional and private investors. From time to time, 
MFG attends private investor events, providing an opportunity 
for  those  investors  to  meet  with  representatives  from  the 
Group in a more informal setting. 

QCA  Principal  3:  Take  into  account  wider  stakeholder  and 
social  responsibilities  and  their  implications  for  long-term 
success 
The Group is aware of its corporate social responsibilities and 
the need to maintain effective working relationships across a 
range  of  stakeholder  groups.  These  include  not  only  the 
Group’s 
regulatory 
partners, 
authorities, but also customers, be they depositors, borrowers 
or  seeking  financial  advice.  The  Group’s  operations  and 
working  methodologies  take  account  of  the  requirement  to 
balance  the  needs  of  all  of  these  stakeholder  groups  while 
maintaining  focus  on  the  Board’s  primary  responsibility  to 
promote  the  success  of  the  Group  for  the  benefit  of  its 
members as a whole. 

employees, 

suppliers, 

  Shareholders – where appropriate shareholder feedback 
is discussed at the Board, with any actions agreed being 
tracked  to  completion  by  the  Company  Secretary. 
Shareholders have an opportunity to raise questions to 
the  Board,  in  person  or  via  a  nominee,  at  the  Annual 
General Meeting. In addition, the Group CEO meets with 
and addresses shareholder concerns where appropriate; 

  Employees – the Group collates employee feedback on 
an  annual  basis,  engages  employees  via  workshops, 
with  all  outputs  analysed  and  visibly  addressed  by  the 
Executives of the operational subsidiaries that form the 
Group;  with  the  aim  being  to  build  an  engaged, 
committed and enthusiastic workforce;  

The  Group  has  adopted  a  portfolio  approach  to  its  strategic 
assets  and  is  not  dependent  on  one  particular  platform 
technology. The Directors believe that this approach helps to 
mitigate any concentration risk. 

  Partners and Suppliers – the Executive and Management 
regularly meet with our partners and suppliers to ensure 
the  needs  of  all  parties  are  understood  in  order  to 
achieve continued excellent working relations; 

The Group largely operates in an inherently heavily regulated 
sector and this is reflected in the emphasis on compliance and 
the provision of excellent customer service. 

In  executing  the  Group’s  strategy  and  operational  plans, 
management  will  typically  confront  a  range  of  day-to-day 
challenges  associated  with  risks  and  uncertainties,  and  will 
seek to deploy the identified mitigation steps to manage these 
risks as they manifest themselves.  

QCA  Principle  2:  Seek  to  understand  and  meet  shareholder 
needs and expectations 
The Group, via the CEO, seeks to maintain a regular dialogue 
with both existing and potential new Shareholders in order to 
communicate  the  Group’s  strategy  and  to  understand  the 
needs and expectations of Shareholders. 

Beyond  the  Annual  General  Meeting,  the  CEO  and,  where 
appropriate, other members of the senior management team 
will  meet  with  investors  and  analysts  to  provide  them  with 
updates  on  the  Group’s  business  and  to  obtain  feedback 
regarding the market’s expectations of the Group. 

  Customers  –  are  at  the  heart  of  all  we  do,  the  Group 
operates  with  a  shared  vision  and  set  of  values.  The 
values  instil  a  sense  of  how  all  staff  form  a  part  of  the 
customer journey. Feedback is encouraged at all points 
of  contact,  it  is  proactively  enacted  upon  as  it  aids  the 
identification of process and system enhancements; and 

  Environment  -  the  Group  takes  due  account  of  any 
impact  that  its  activities  may  have  on  the  environment 
and  seeks  to  minimise  this  impact  by  demonstrating 
leadership 
in  corporate  citizenship.  Our  continued 
dedication toward making a positive contribution to our 
communities  and  offering  a  great  place  to  work  is 
subsidiaries’ 
demonstrated 
involvement in community events, charitable fundraising 
and  the  provision  of  ongoing  support.  In  doing  so  the 
Group  ensures  continuous 
the 
management  of  our  environmental  impact,  in  line  with 
the  principles and standards  set out within the Group’s 
Corporate Social Responsibility Policy. 

the  operational 

improvement 

via 

in 

Page | 15  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

QCA  Principal  4:  Embed  effective 
risk  management, 
considering  both  opportunities  and  threats,  throughout  the 
organisation 
The Board is responsible for the systems of risk management 
and internal control and for reviewing their effectiveness by a 
series of committees, overseen by the  ARCC, and reviewed 
by  Internal  Audit.  The  internal  controls  are  designed  to 
manage rather than eliminate risk and provide reasonable but 
not absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss. 
Through the activities of the ARCC, which meets at least six 
times per year, the effectiveness of these internal controls is 
formally reviewed four times per year. 

A comprehensive budgeting process is completed once a year 
and  is  reviewed  and  approved  by  the  Board.  The  Group’s 
results, compared with the budget, are reported to the Board 
on a monthly basis. 

The Group maintains appropriate insurance cover in respect 
of actions taken against the Directors because of their roles, 
as well as against material loss or claims against the Group. 
The  insured  values  and  type  of  cover  are  comprehensively 
reviewed on at least an annual basis. 

The senior management team meets weekly to consider new 
risks  and  opportunities  presented  to  the  Group,  making 
recommendations  to  the  Board  and  /  or  the  ARCC  as 
appropriate. 

The Directors consider they provide all necessary information 
to  assess  the  Company’s  position,  performance,  business 
model and strategy. 

QCA  Principal  5:  Maintain  the  board  as  a  well-functioning, 
balanced team led by the chair 
The  Board currently comprises four Non-executive Directors 
and three Executive Directors. 

All of the Directors are subject to election by Shareholders at 
the first Annual General Meeting after their appointment to the 
Board and will continue to seek re-election at least once every 
three years. 

Directors’ biographies are set out on pages 19 and 20. 

The  Board is responsible to the Shareholders for  the proper 
management of the Group and meets at least four times a year 
to set the overall direction and strategy of the Group, to review 
operational  and  financial  performance,  and  to  advise  on 
management  appointments.  All  key  operational  and 
investment decisions are subject to Board approval. 

The Board considers itself to be sufficiently independent. The 
QCA  Code  suggests  that  a  board  should  have  at  least  two 
independent  non-executive  directors.  The  Board  considers 
that  three  Non-executive  Directors,  namely  Alan  Clarke 
(Chairman of the ARCC), David Gibson and John Spellman, 
are regarded as independent under the QCA Code’s guidance 
for determining such independence. 

Non-executive  Directors  receive  their  fees  in  the  form  of  a 
basic cash emolument. The Group Finance Director is the only 
Director  who  holds  options  over  the  Group’s  shares.  The 
number and terms are found on page 26. 

The option grant concerned is not  deemed  to be  significant, 
either for the individual Executive Director or in aggregate. The 
current remuneration structure for the Board’s Non-executive 
Directors is deemed to be proportionate. 

QCA Principal 6: Ensure that between them the directors have 
the necessary up-to-date experience, skills and capabilities 
The  Board  considers  that  all of  the  Non-executive  Directors 
are of sufficient competence and calibre to add strength and 
objectivity to its activities, and bring considerable experience 
in regulatory, financial and operational development within the 
financial service sector in both the IOM and the UK. 

The Directors’ biographies are set out on pages 19 and 20. 

The Board regularly reviews the composition of the Board to 
ensure that it has the necessary breadth and depth of skills to 
support the ongoing development of the Group. 

The  Chairman,  in  conjunction  with  the  Company  Secretary, 
ensures  that  the  Directors’  knowledge  is  kept  up-to-date  on 
key  issues  and  developments  pertaining  to  the  Group,  its 
operational environment and to the Directors’ responsibilities 
as  members  of  the  Board.  During  the  course  of  the  year, 
Directors  receive  updates  from  the  Company  Secretary  and 
various  external  advisers  on  a  number  of  corporate 
governance matters. 

Directors’  service  contracts  or  appointment  letters  make 
provision for a Director to seek personal advice in furtherance 
of  his  or  her  duties  and  responsibilities,  normally  via  the 
Company Secretary. 

QCA Principal 7: Evaluate board performance based on clear 
and relevant objectives, seeking continuous improvement 
The  Board  has  an  internal  process  for  evaluation  of  its  own 
performance, that of its committees and individual Directors, 
including  the  Chairman.  This  process  is  conducted  annually 
and last took place in April 2020, with no substantive issues 
arising.  

The  Board  may  utilise  the  results  of  the  evaluation  process 
when  considering  the  adequacy  of  the  composition  of  the 
Board and for succession planning. 

QCA Principal 8: Promote a corporate culture that is based on 
ethical values and behaviours 
The Board seeks to maintain the highest standards of integrity 
and probity  in  the conduct  of the  Group’s  operations.  These 
values  are  enshrined  in  the  written  policies  and  working 
practices  adopted  by  all  employees  in  the  Group.  An  open 
culture 
the  Group,  with  regular 
communications to staff regarding progress and staff feedback 
regularly  sought.  The  senior  management  team  regularly 
monitors  the  Group’s  cultural  environment  and  seeks  to 
address  any  concerns  that  may  arise,  escalating  these  to 
Board level as necessary. 

is  encouraged  within 

The Group is committed to providing a safe environment for its 
staff and all other parties for which the Group has a legal or 
moral  responsibility  in  this  area.  This  is  enshrined  in  the 
Group’s health and safety policy. 

Page | 16  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

QCA  Principal  9:  Maintain  governance  structures  and 
processes that are fit for purpose and support good decision- 
making by the board 
The role of the Board  
The Board is collectively responsible for the long-term success 
of  the  organisation.  Its  principal  function  is  to  determine  the 
strategy and policies of the Group within an effective control 
framework which enables risk to be assessed and managed. 
The Governance Framework is reviewed to ensure it remains 
fit  for  purpose  on  an  annual  basis  and  is  approved  by  the 
Board. 

The  Board  ensures  that  the  necessary  financial  and  human 
resources are in place for the Group to meet its objectives and 
that  business  and  management  performances  are  reviewed. 
Furthermore, the Board ensures that the Group operates within 
its  constitution,  relevant  legislation  and  regulation  and  that 
proper accounting records and effective systems of business 
control are established, maintained, documented and audited.  

There  are at least four formal Board  meetings each year. All 
Board members have the benefit, at the Group’s expense, of 
liability  insurance  in  respect  of  their  responsibilities  as 
Directors  and  have  access  to  independent  legal  or  other 
professional  advice  if  required.  The  Board  has  a  formal 
schedule  of  matters  which  are  reserved  for  its  consideration 
and  it  has  established  three  committees  to  consider  specific 
issues  in  greater  detail,  being  the  ARCC,  the  Remuneration 
Committee  and  the  Nomination  Committee.  The  Terms  of 
Reference for each of these Committees are published on the 
Group’s website www.mfg.im.  

There is a clear separation of the roles of CEO and Executive 
Chairman. 

Chairman  
The  Chairman is  responsible for leading  the Board, ensuring 
its effectiveness in all aspects of its role, promoting a culture of 
openness  of  debate  and  communicating  with  the  Group’s 
members  on  behalf  of  the  Board.  The  Chairman  sets  the 
direction of the Board and promotes a culture of openness and 
debate  by  facilitating  the  effective  contribution  of  Non-
executive  Directors  and  ensuring  constructive  relations 
between  Executive  and  Non-executive  Directors.  The 
Chairman also ensures that Directors receive accurate, timely 
and  clear  information.  In  doing  so,  this  fosters  a  positive 
corporate governance culture throughout the Group.  

Chief Executive Officer  
The  CEO  is  responsible  for  managing  the  Group’s  business 
and operations within the parameters set by the Board.  

Non-executive Directors  
The  Non-executive  Directors  are  responsible  for  bringing 
independent judgement to the discussions held by the Board, 
using  their  breadth  of  experience  and  understanding  of  the 
business.  Their  key  responsibilities  are  to  constructively 
challenge and contribute to strategic proposals, and to monitor 
performance, 
resources,  and  standards  of  conduct, 
compliance and control, whilst providing support to executive 
management in developing the Group. 

The  Board  has  established  an  ARCC,  a  Remuneration 
Committee  and  a  Nomination  Committee  with  formally 
delegated duties and responsibilities.  

and 

Group Audit, Risk and Compliance Committee (“ARCC”) 
The ARCC meets at least six times each year and comprises 
of  three  Non-executive  Directors,  currently  Alan  Clarke 
(Chairman),  David  Gibson 
John  Spellman. 
Representatives from Compliance and Risk, the Internal and 
External  Auditor  and  executive  management  attend  by 
invitation. Its role is to be responsible for reviewing the integrity 
of  the  financial  statements  and  the  balance  of  information 
disclosed in the accompanying Directors’ Report, to review the 
effectiveness  of  internal  controls  and  risk  management 
systems,  to  monitor  and  review  the  effectiveness  of  the 
internal audit function and to consider and recommend to the 
Board (for approval by the members) the appointment or re-
appointment of the External Auditor. The ARCC reviews and 
monitors  the  External  Auditor’s  objectivity,  competence, 
effectiveness  and  independence,  ensuring  that  if  it  or  its 
associates are invited to undertake non-audit work it will not 
compromise auditor objectivity and independence. 

Group Remuneration Committee (“REMCO”) 
The REMCO meets at least twice a year and comprises of two 
Non-executive  Directors,  with the  Executive  Directors,  Head 
of  Human  Resources  and  external  advisers  attending  by 
invitation when appropriate. It is chaired by Alan Clarke and is 
responsible,  amongst  other  matters,  for  determining  the 
remuneration  of  the  Executive  Directors,  the  Company 
Secretary and other members of the management. Committee 
members do not take part in discussions concerning their own 
remuneration.  The  Chairman  and  CEO  determine  Non-
executive Director fees. 

The  Directors  believe  that  the  above  disclosures  constitute 
sufficient disclosure to meet the QCA Code’s requirement for 
a Remuneration Committee Report.  

Group Nomination Committee (“NOMCO”) 
The NOMCO is comprised of the whole Board. It is chaired by 
the  Chairman  of  the  Board  and  is  responsible  for  making 
recommendations  to  the  Board  on  matters  relating  to  the 
composition  of  the  Board,  including  Executive  and  Non-
executive  Director  succession  planning,  the  appointment  of 
new Directors and re-election of existing Directors. 

Appointments to the Board  
The  principal  purpose  of  the  Nomination  Committee  is  to 
undertake the assessment of the balance of skills, experience, 
independence  and  knowledge  on  the  Board  and  subsidiary 
boards against the requirements of the business, with a view 
to determining whether any shortages exist. Having completed 
the  assessment,  the  Committee  makes  recommendations  to 
the Board  accordingly.  Appointments  to  the  Board  are made 
on merit, with due regard to the benefits of diversity. Within this 
context,  the  paramount  objective  is  the  selection  of  the  best 
candidate, irrespective of background, and it is the view of the 
Board that establishing quotas or targets for the diversity of the 
Board is not appropriate.  

All  Group  Director  appointments  must  be  approved  by  the 
Company’s  Nominated  Adviser,  as  required  under  the  AIM 
Rules, before they are appointed to the Group Board.  

Page | 17  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

Prior to appointment, Non-executive Directors are required to 
demonstrate  that  they  are  able  to  allocate  sufficient  time  to 
undertake their duties. 

Re-election  
The Group’s Rules require that all Directors are submitted for 
election  at  the  AGM  following  their  first  appointment  to  the 
Board and one third of the Directors are subject to retirement 
by  rotation  on  an  annual  basis  to  refresh  the  Board, 
irrespective of performance. 

The Corporate Governance Manual also contains a schedule 
of matters specifically reserved for Board decision or approval 
and sets out the Company’s share dealing code and its public 
interest disclosure (“whistle-blowing”) policy and procedures. 

Board and committee attendance 
The  number  of  formal  scheduled  Board  and  Committee 
meetings held and attended by Directors during the year was 
as follows:  

Jim Mellon 
Denham Eke 
Douglas Grant 
Alan Clarke 
David Gibson 
Gregory Bailey 
John Spellman * 
John Banks ~ 

Board  ARCC  REMCO  NOMCO 
1/2 
1/2 
2/2 
2/2 
2/2 
2/2 
1/1 
1/1 

- 
- 
- 
10/10 
10/10 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
7/7 
7/7 
- 
5/5 
- 

4/6 
6/6 
6/6 
6/6 
6/6 
5/6 
5/5 
2/2 

~ John Banks resigned 14 April 2020 
* John Spellman appointed 4 May 2020 

QCA  Principal  10:  Communicate  how  the  company  is 
governed  and  is  performing  by  maintaining  a  dialogue  with 
shareholders and other relevant stakeholders 
The Group places a high priority on regular communications 
with its various stakeholder groups and aims to ensure that all 
communications  concerning  the  Group’s  activities  are  clear, 
fair  and  accurate.  The  Group’s  website  is  regularly  updated 
and users can register to be alerted when announcements or 
details  of  presentations  and  events  are  posted  onto  the 
website. 

Notices of General Meetings of the Company can be found on: 
https://www.mfg.im/investor-centre/regulatory-news 

The  results  of  voting  on  all  resolutions  in  future  general 
meetings will be posted to the Group’s website, including any 
actions to be taken as a result of resolutions for which votes 
against  have  been  received  from  at  least  20  per  cent  of 
independent Shareholders. 

Approval  
This report was approved by the Board on 3 March 2021 and 
signed on its behalf by: 

Jim Mellon  
Executive Chairman  
3 March 2021 

Page | 18  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS, OFFICERS AND ADVISERS 

Executive Directors 

Jim Mellon (64)‡ 
Executive Chairman 

Denham Eke (69) ‡ 
Chief Executive Officer 

Douglas Grant (56) ‡ 
Group Finance Director 

Denham Eke is the Managing Director of Burnbrae 
Group  Limited,  a  private 
international  asset 
management  company.  He  began  his  career  in 
stockbroking  with  Sheppards  &  Chase  before 
moving into corporate planning for Hogg Robinson 
plc, a major multinational insurance broker. He is a 
director of many years standing of both public and 
private  companies 
financial 
involved 
services,  property,  mining,  and  manufacturing 
sectors.  

the 

in 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board on 2 November 2007 and 
appointed as Chief Executive on 12 February 2009.  

Douglas  Grant  has  over  30  years’  experience 
working in finance, initially with Scottish Power, 
before  moving  to  the  industrial  sector  to  work 
with  ICI  and  then  Allenwest.  Prior  to  joining 
Manx  Financial  Group  PLC,  he  was  finance 
director  of various  UK  and  Isle  of Man  private 
sector  companies  and  has  extensive  capital 
markets  experience.  He  is  a  professionally 
qualified banker with an executive MBA. 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board on 14 January 2010.  He 
is also the Managing Director of Conister Bank 
Limited. 

Jim  Mellon 
is  a  well-known  and  successful 
entrepreneur,  author  and  economic  commentator, 
starting  his  career  in  fund  management  and  now 
including  biopharma,  property,  mining  and 
information 
technology  amongst  his  many 
investments. He holds directorships in a number of 
companies,  both  quoted  and  unquoted,  including 
the  chairmanship  of  Juvenescence  Limited  and 
being  a  non-executive  director  of  Agronomics 
Limited. He, together with Burnbrae Group Limited, 
of which he is the beneficial owner, holds a 18.83% 
shareholding  of Manx Financial Group  PLC. He  is 
the founder, principal shareholder and chairman of 
the Regent Pacific Group, quoted on the Hong Kong 
Stock Exchange. 

Appointment 
Appointed to  the  Board  on  2  November  2007  and 
appointed as Executive Chairman on  12 February 
2009. 

Non-executive Directors 

 Alan Clarke (70)‡†* ≠  
Non-executive Director 

David Gibson (73) ‡†* ≠ 
Non-executive Director 

Gregory Bailey (65) ‡ 
Non-executive Director 

Alan  Clarke  is  a  chartered accountant  and  former 
senior partner of Ernst & Young during which time 
he worked closely with HSBC offshore operations in 
both  the  Channel  Islands  and  the  Isle  of  Man. 
Currently,  he  specialises  in corporate  finance  and 
strategic    consultancy,  advising  a  variety  of  both 
listed and private companies. He holds several non-
executive  directorships  and  is  a  past  President  of 
ICAEW Manchester. 

Appointment 
Appointed  to  the  Board  on  2  November  2007. 
Chairman  of  the  Audit,  Risk  and  Compliance 
Committee  and  Chairman  of  the  Remuneration 
Committee.  

David  Gibson  qualified  as  a  certified  accountant 
whilst  holding  posts  with  Shell-Mex  and  BP  and 
CIBA-Geigy throughout the UK and abroad, before 
transferring  into  treasury  management  in  senior 
positions  with  Turner  and  Newall  and  Westland 
Helicopters  where  he  qualified  as  a  corporate 
treasurer. He  joined  the  Trustee  Savings  Bank  of 
the  Channel  Islands  as  finance  director,  prior  to 
becoming  general manager finance at TSB Retail 
Bank where he gained his formal qualifications as 
a  banker.  Prior  to  retiring  from  executive  life  for 
family  reasons,  he  was  group  finance  director  of 
Portman  Building  Society.  He  is  also  deputy 
chairman of two property investment companies. 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board on 12 February 2009. He is 
Chairman of Conister Bank Limited. 

Gregory  Bailey,  founded  Palantir  Group  Inc 
which made successful investments in bio-tech 
company  start-ups  and  financings,  and  is 
currently CEO of Juvenescence Ltd, chairman 
of  Portage  Biotech  Inc,  a  CSE-traded  drug 
development  company  and  non-executive 
director 
Biohaven 
Pharmaceuticals Holding Company.  Along with 
comprehensive  experience 
finance  and 
healthcare,  he  has  served  on  many  public 
company  boards  and  brings  to  the  Group  an 
extensive 
corporate 
governance.  

involvement 

of  NYSE 

traded 

in 

in 

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board on 7 February 2018. 

Page | 19  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS, OFFICERS AND ADVISERS 

Non-executive Directors 

Company Secretary    

*   Member  of 

the  Audit,  Risk  and 

Compliance Committee 

† Member of the Remuneration Committee 
‡ Member of the Nominations Committee 
≠  Independent Non-executive Director 

John Spellman (54) ‡* ≠ 
Non-executive Director 

Lesley Crossley (53) 
Company Secretary 

John Spellman is both a qualified accountant and banker. 
He spent  his  early  years  in banking,  fund  management 
and accountancy specialising in the various parts of the 
offshore  industry  before  being  appointed  managing 
director  of Clerical Medical Offshore.  He  transferred to 
the UK as chief operating officer within Clerical Medical 
Financial  Services  before  being  appointed  managing 
director of HBoS Financial Services. He has worked with 
and created a number of successful businesses and has 
wide experience liaising with government regulators.  He 
has  held  approved  status  with  the  Isle  of  Man  FSA  in 
various  roles  and  has  acted  as  strategic  advisor  to the 
Isle  of  Man  government,  specialising  in  finance  and 
foreign direct investment for over 10 years.  

Appointment 
Appointed to the Board on 4 May 2020. 

Lesley  Crossley  is  a  Fellow  of  The  Chartered 
Institute  of  Secretaries  and  Administrators  and  an 
Associate of the Chartered Insurance Institute.  She 
has over 30 years of wide-ranging experience in the 
financial  services  industry  both  in  the  UK  and  the 
Isle  of Man  and has  held the  position  of Company 
Secretary  with  a  number  of  Isle  of  Man  and 
international companies. 

Appointment 
Appointed as Company Secretary on 2 September 
2019. 

John  Banks resigned from the Board  and  his  role as Non-executive Director and Member of the Nominations 
Committee on 14 April 2020. 

Advisers 

Registered Office 
Clarendon House 
Victoria Street 
Douglas 
Isle of Man IM1 2LN 

Registered Agent 
CW Corporate Services Limited 
Bank Chambers 
15-19 Athol Street  
Douglas 
Isle of Man IM1 1LB 

Legal Advisers 
As to Isle of Man law 
Long & Humphrey 
The Old Courthouse 
Athol Street 
Douglas 
Isle of Man IM1 1LD 

As to English law 
Hill Dickinson LLP 
The Broadgate Tower 
20 Primrose Street 
London EC21 2EW 

Independent Auditor 
KPMG Audit LLC 
Heritage Court 
41 Athol Street 
Douglas 
Isle of Man IM1 1LA 

Principal Bankers 
National Westminster Bank plc 
250 Bishopsgate 
London EC2M 4AA 

Consulting Actuaries 
Boal & Co Ltd 
Marquis House 
Isle of Man Business Park 
Douglas 
Isle of Man IM2 2QZ 

Nominated Advisor  
and Broker 
Beaumont Cornish 
Building 3 
Chiswick Park 
566 Chiswick High Road 
London W4 5YA 

Registrar 
Computershare Investor  
Services (Jersey) Limited 
13 Castle Street 
St Helier 
Jersey JE1 1ES 

Presentation  of  Annual 
Report and Accounts 
Presented  here  are  the 
and 
Annual 
Manx 
Accounts 
Financial Group PLC. 

Report 
of 

Company Information 
The  Annual  and  Interim 
Reports,  along  with  other 
supplementary 
information  of  interest  to 
Shareholders, 
are 
included  on  its  website. 
The  address  of 
the 
is  www.mfg.im 
website 
which 
investor 
includes 
relations  information  and 
contact details. 

Page | 20  

 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

AUDIT, RISK AND COMPLIANCE COMMITTEE  

Dear Shareholders 
I am pleased to set out below an account of the ARCC’s role 
and activities during 2020 and up to the date of publication of 
this Annual Report.  

the  Nomination  Committee, 

Membership 
Members  of  the  ARCC  are  appointed  by  the  Board,  on  the 
in 
recommendation  of 
consultation  with  the  Chairman  of  the  Committee.  The 
Committee  shall  be  made  up  of  at  least  2  members.  All 
members of the Committee shall be Non-executive Directors 
and  at  least  one  of  whom  shall  have  recent  and  relevant 
financial experience with a professional qualification from one 
of the professional accountancy bodies. The Chairman of the 
Board shall not be a member of the Committee.  

Appointments to the Committee shall be for a period of up to 
3 years, which may be extended by the Board for a further 3-
year  period  (or,  in  exceptional  circumstances,  two  further  3 
year  periods),  provided  the  Director  remains  independent.  
The  Board  may  approve  annual  extensions  to  any  Director 
who has served 3 consecutive terms. 

The Board shall appoint the Chairman of the Committee who 
shall  be  a  Non-executive  Director.    In  the  absence  of  the 
Chairman of the Committee and / or an appointed deputy, the 
remaining members present shall elect one of themselves to 
chair the meeting. 

The Committee shall meet at least six times a year.  Of these, 
two  will  be  held  to  review  the  annual  and  interim  financial 
statements.  Outside  of  the  formal  meeting  programme,  the 
Chairman of the Committee will maintain a dialogue with key 
individuals involved in the Company’s governance. 

Members 

Appointed  

Alan Clarke (Chairman)  2 February 2007 
David Gibson 
John Spellman 

13 February 2009 
4 May 2020 

Number of 
meetings 
attended 
7/7 
7/7 
5/5 

Only  members  of  the  Committee  have  the  right  to  attend 
Committee  meetings.    However  other  individuals  may  be 
invited by the Chairman of the Committee to attend all or part 
of any meeting as and when appropriate.  

The ARCC holds separate meetings with the Head of Internal 
Audit, Head of Risk and Compliance and our External Auditor, 
KPMG Audit LLC. 

The  Chairman  of  the  Board,  the  Executive  Directors  and 
executive management are invitees to meetings of the ARCC 
but are excluded from the separate meetings held between the 
ARCC and the External Auditor. 

Execution of functions 
The ARCC has executed its duties and responsibilities during 
the year in accordance with its terms of reference as it relates 
to auditor independence, assisting the Board in its evaluation 
of  our  control  environment  and  internal  controls  including 
information systems and accounting practices. 

Due  to  its  adoption  of  the  QCA  Corporate  Governance 
standard,  the  Committee  reassessed  the  adequacy  of  its 

terms  of  reference  and  its  function  bearing  in  mind  the 
requirements of this standard. 

During  the  year  under  review,  the  Committee  considered 
among other matters, the following: 

Financial reporting and annual financial statements: 

  Considered the annual financial statements with the 
External  Auditor,  Executive  Directors 
and 
management  and  reviewed  the  appropriateness  of 
significant  judgements,  estimates  and  accounting 
policies; 

  Reviewed  and  recommended  to  the  Board  for 

approval: 

o  Unaudited condensed interim results for the 

period-ended 30 June 2020; 

o  Audited  MFG  PLC  Group  and  subsidiary 
annual  financial  statements  for  the  year-
ended 31 December 2020; and 
  Discussed  any  significant  and  unusual  accounting 
matters including key audit matters identified by the 
External Auditor. 

External audit: 

  Monitored  and  assessed  the  independence  of  the 
External  Auditor  based  on  reports  received  and 
inquiries made into work performed; 

  Determined  the  nature  and  extent  of  non-audit 

services performed by the External Auditor; 

  Reviewed  and  assessed  the  significance  of  non-

audit fees compared to audit fees; 

  Reviewed  and  agreed  the  external  audit  plan  in 
advance  for  the  year-end  audit  which  set  out  the 
scope of audit, significant risks, areas of audit focus 
and audit timetable; 

  Received a presentation from the External Auditor on 
the  findings  from  their  execution  of  the  audit  plan; 
and 

  Satisfied  itself  as  to  the  expertise  experience  and 

independence of the engagement partner. 

Internal audit: 

  Reviewed and approved the Internal Audit plan; 
  Reviewed  Internal  Audit’s  findings  including  the 
design  and  operating  effectiveness  of  the  internal 
control environment and control activities; and  
  Reviewed Internal Audit’s findings on the adequacy 

and reliability of management information. 

Risk and compliance: 

  Assessed  the  effectiveness  of  the  Group  Risk  and 

Compliance function; 

  Reviewed 

the  Group  Risk  and  Compliance 
department  findings  on  the  effectiveness  of  the 
Group’s regulatory controls; 

  Recommended  a 

revision  of 

the  Risk  and 

Compliance policies for Board approval; and 

  Recommended  a  revision  of  the  Internal  Capital 
Adequacy Assessment Process for Board approval. 

Page | 21  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

AUDIT, RISK AND COMPLIANCE COMMITTEE  

External Auditor’s independence  
The External Auditor, KPMG Audit LLC, has been the Group’s 
auditor since 2007. 

Consideration was given to the non-audit work performed by 
the External Auditor. The ratio of non-audit fees to audit fees 
for the year was 0.06 to 1 (2019: 0.87 to 1). Non audit services 
related  to  transaction  services  and  tax  advisory  services. 
Services were performed by a separate team to the audit team 
to safeguard against the self-review threat to independence. 

The ARCC obtained assurance from the External Auditor that 
internal  governance  processes  within  KPMG  Audit  LLC 
support  and  demonstrate  its  claim  of  independence.  This 
assurance  was  provided  through  the  receipt  of  an  ISA  260 
letter. 

The ARCC is satisfied with the independence of KPMG Audit 
LLC. 

External Auditor’s reappointment 
The ARCC is responsible for recommending to the Board the 
reappointment of the Group’s External Auditor which, in turn, 
will make a recommendation to its Shareholders. 

Key accounting matter 
Loan  impairment  –  wholesale  funding  and  individual  finance 
agreements 
Impairments cover loans specifically identified as impaired and 
a collective impairment of all other loans for those impairments 
incurred but not yet specifically identified.  

Loan impairment provisions reflect estimates of the amount and 
timing  of  future  recoveries  which  require  an  assessment  of 
matters  such  as  future  economic  conditions  and  the  value  of 
collateral. Estimates, by their nature, give rise to a higher risk of 
material misstatement due to error or fraud.  

The  effect  of  these  matters  is  that,  as  part  of  the  External 
Auditor’s risk assessment, they determined that the impairment 
provision  has  a  high  degree  of  estimation  uncertainty,  with  a 
potential  range  of  reasonable  outcomes  greater  than  their 
materiality for the financial statements as a whole, and possibly 
many times that amount. 
Impairment of goodwill and intangible assets 
Goodwill and intangible assets are significant and the estimated 
recoverable amount of these balances is subjective due to the 
inherent  uncertainty  involved  in  forecasting  and  discounting 
future  cash  flows  for  the  goodwill  impairment  test  and  in 
performing  a  review  for  indicators  of  impairment  for  intangible 
assets. 

The  effect  of  these  matters  is  that,  as  part  of  the  External 
Auditor’s risk assessment, they have determined that the value 
in use of goodwill has a high degree of estimation uncertainty, 
with a potential range of reasonable outcomes greater than their 
materiality for the financial statements as a whole. 

It  is  noted  that  with  good  corporate  governance,  an  audit 
tender  process  should  regularly  be  conducted.  With  this  in 
mind,  the  ARCC  are  considering  whether  an  audit  tender 
process should commence for the year-ended 31 December 
2021.  This  will  allow  sufficient  time  to  run  a  comprehensive 
and considered tender process subject to any delays related 
to COVID-19. 

The ARCC therefore recommend to the Board that its External 
Auditor be reappointed for the year-ended 31 December 2021, 
whilst it considers a tender process.  

Firms  outside  the  Big  4  would  be  invited  to  take  part  in this 
process  so  long  as  they  have  sufficient  resources  and 
expertise  to  merit  their  inclusion.  There  are  no  anticipated 
conflicts  of  interest  noted  at  this  time  and  should  any  arise, 
they will be mitigated appropriately. 

Key accounting matters 
The  ARCC  considered  key  accounting  matters  in  relation  to 
the Group’s financial statements and disclosures. The primary 
areas  in  relation  to  2020  and  how  they  were  addressed  are 
detailed below: 

ARCC response 
The ARCC satisfied itself that the internal control environment 
and  control  activities  are  appropriately  designed  and 
implemented.  This  was  supported  by  review  of  Internal  and 
External Audit reports and findings. 

The ARCC reviewed reports from executive management on the 
continued implementation of IFRS 9 and key changes to internal 
the  key 
processes  and  controls.  The  ARCC  reviewed 
assumptions used by management such as Loss Given Default, 
Loss Rates, Probability of Default on a quarterly basis. 

The ARCC satisfied itself that the internal control environment 
and  control  activities  are  appropriately  designed  and 
implemented.  This  was  supported  by  review  of  Internal  and 
External Audit reports and findings. 

The  ARCC  reviewed  management’s  assessment  of  Goodwill 
and  Intangible  Asset  impairment  and  concluded  that  the 
recoverable amount is appropriate. 

Page | 22  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

AUDIT, RISK AND COMPLIANCE COMMITTEE  

ARCC response 
The ARCC is satisfied that the going concern assessment over 
the Group provides sufficient assurance over the recoverability 
of  the  Company’s  subordinated  loans  and  investment  in 
subsidiaries. 

Key accounting matter 
Carrying  value  of  Company’s  subordinated 
investment in subsidiaries 
The carrying value of the Company’s subordinated loans to and 
investment in subsidiaries represents 94% (2019: 97%) of the 
Parent Company’s total assets.  

loans  and 

The  assessment  of  carrying  value  is  not  at  a  high  risk  of 
significant misstatement or subject to significant judgement as 
the carrying value is supported by the audited net asset value 
of the subsidiaries. 

However,  due  to  its  materiality  in  the  context  of  the  MFG 
financial statements, the External Auditor considered this to be 
the area that had the greatest effect on their overall MFG audit. 

The ARCC has complied with and discharged its responsibilities as set out in its Terms of Reference. 

Alan Clarke 
Chairman 
3 March 2021 

Page | 23  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT 

Dear Shareholders 
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report for the year ended 31 December 2020. 

Membership 
Members  of  the  Remuneration  Committee  (“REMCO”)  are 
appointed  by  the  Board,  on  the  recommendation  of  the 
Nomination  Committee  in  consultation  with  the  Chairman  of 
the Committee. The Committee shall be made up of at least 2 
members.  All  members  of  the  Committee  shall  be  Non-
executive Directors. The Chairman of the Board shall not be a 
member of the Committee. 

Appointments to the Committee shall be for a period of up to 
3 years, which may be extended by the Board for a further 3-
year  period  (or,  in  exceptional  circumstances,  two  further  3 
year  periods),  provided  the  Director  remains  independent.  
The  Board  may  approve  annual  extensions  to  any  Director 
who has served 3 consecutive terms. 

The Board shall appoint the Chairman of the Committee who 
shall  be  a  Non-executive  Director.  In  the  absence  of  the 
Chairman of the Committee and/or an appointed deputy, the 
remaining members present shall elect one of themselves to 
chair the meeting. 

The  Committee shall meet at least twice a year and  at such 
other times as the Chairman of the Committee shall require. 

Membership 

Appointed 

Alan Clarke (Chairman)  13 February 2009 
David Gibson 

12 December 2010 

Number of 
meetings 
attended 
10/10 
10/10 

Only  members  of  the  Committee  have  the  right  to  attend 
Committee  meetings.  However,  other  individuals  may  be 
invited by the Chairman of the Committee to attend all or part 
of any meeting as and when appropriate. 

Areas of focus for 2020 
During the year, the Committee considered the following: 
  Reviewed the overall pay of Executive Directors; 
  Reviewed 
non-discretionary 
overall 

the 

annual 

performance related pay scheme for Group staff; and 
  Reviewed and approved all new Group staff appointments 

with annual packages over £50,000. 

Remuneration policy 
The  Group’s  Remuneration  Policy  reflects  the  Group’s 
business  strategy  and  objectives  as  well  as  sustained  and 
long-term  value  creation  for  shareholders.    In  addition,  the 
policy  aims  to  be  fair  and  provide  equality  of  opportunity, 
ensuring that:  

  the  Group  is  able  to  attract,  develop  and  retain  high-
performing  and  motivated  employees  in  the  competitive 
local IOM and wider UK markets; 

  employees  are  offered  a  competitive  remuneration 
package to encourage enhanced performance and are, in 
a fair and responsible manner, rewarded for their individual 
contribution to the success of the Group; 
  it reflects the Group’s culture and values; and  
  there  is  full  transparency  of  the  Group’s  Remuneration 

Policy. 

In line with the Board’s approach, which reflects that adopted 
within  other  comparable  organisations, 
the  Group’s 
Remuneration  Policy  provides  for  the  reward  of  Executive 
Directors through salaries and other benefits.  

Executive Directors’ Emoluments 
The  remuneration  for  Executive  Directors  reflects  their 
It  comprises  basic  salary,  performance 
responsibilities. 
related variable pay when this is considered appropriate, and 
various benefits detailed below.  

Performance  related  payments  are  not  pensionable  and  are 
not contracted.  

As with staff generally, whose salaries are subject to annual 
reviews,  basic  salaries  payable  to  Executive  Directors  are 
reviewed  each  year  with  reference  to  jobs  carrying  similar 
responsibilities in comparable financial organisations, market 
conditions generally and local employment competition in view 
of the Group’s geographical position.  

The  Group  operates  a  non-contractual  discretionary  annual 
performance  related  pay  scheme  based  on  the  trading 
performance  of  the  Group  and  the  individual  employee’s 
performance  assessed  for  the  period  under  review  in  a 
manner which promotes sound risk management and does not 
promote excessive risk taking.   

The non-contractual discretionary annual performance related 
pay scheme may be paid in one year but that does not confer 
any entitlement in future years.  

to 
Performance  assessments  are  conducted  annually 
the  performance  rating  of  each  employee’s 
determine 
achievements against a mix of targets set and agreed at the 
beginning  of  each  year  between  the  employee  and  their 
manager.  No incentives are paid to employees or executives 
where  the  performance  rating  reflects  below  an  agreed 
expected level for the role employed. 

The non-contractual discretionary annual performance related 
pay  scheme  may  be  disbursed  as  a  cash  payment  through 
payroll, share based instruments (including share options) or 
a  mixture  of  both.    An  element  of  deferment  to  align  the 
interests  of  the  employee to  the  longer  term  performance  of 
the Group may also be included. 

the  Advisor’s  client  base  and 

EAL’s  Financial  Advisors  are  salaried  and  commission  is 
calculated on a pre-agreed percentage over target which is set 
at between 2 to 3 times annual gross salary depending on the 
size  of 
their  historical 
performance.  Each Financial Advisor is set objectives at the 
beginning of the year including a 100% pass in all compliance 
requirements.  Where indemnified commission is paid and the 
underlying client policy lapses and the commission is clawed 
back then this is reviewed by an Executive Director in order to 
monitor  trends  and  is  then  clawed  back  from  the  relevant 
Financial Advisor. 

Where 
the  Group  operates  contractually  guaranteed 
performance related pay, the contractual conditions must be 
approved by the REMCO.  

Page | 24  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION REPORT 

Executive Directors’ contractual terms 
In keeping with current recommended practice, the standard 
term  for  Executive  Director  appointments,  which  have  a 
contractual notice period, is 6 months.  

Non-executive Directors’ remuneration 
Non-executive Directors do not receive any benefits other than 
their  fees  and  travelling  expenses  for  which  they  are 
reimbursed.  The  level  of  fees  payable  to  Non-executive 
Directors  is  assessed  using  benchmarks  from  a  group  of 
comparable financial organisations.  

The procedure for determining Director remuneration 
The  REMCO,  comprising  two  Non-executive  Directors,  is 
responsible  for  setting  the  remuneration  of  the  Executive 

Directors’ emoluments 

Remuneration/  
Fees 
£ 

Performance 
Related Pay 
£ 

Executives 
Jim Mellon 
Denham Eke 
Douglas Grant 

Non-executives 
Gregory Bailey 
John Banks ~ 
Alan Clarke 
David Gibson 
John Spellman * 

Aggregate 
emoluments 

43,750 
43,750 
211,325 
298,825 

- 
6,250 
45,000 
85,000 
26,667 
162,917 

- 
- 
50,000 
50,000 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

Directors. Committee members do not take part in discussions 
concerning their own remuneration. The basic Non-executive 
Director  fee  is  set  by  the  Group  Chairman  and  CEO.  The 
Chairman  of  the  Committee  reports  at  the  Board  meeting 
following a Committee meeting. 

Implementation report 
It  is  the  view  of  the  Committee  that  Directors’  remuneration 
awarded  across  the  Group  for  the  year  has  been  in 
accordance with the Group’s stated Remuneration Policy and, 
on behalf of the Committee I recommend that you endorse this 
Group  report.    An  analysis  of  Directors’  emoluments  is  as 
follows: 

Pension 
£ 

- 
- 
21,103 
21,103 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

2020 
Total 
£ 

43,750 
43,750 
282,428 
369,928 

- 
6,250 
45,000 
85,000 
26,667 
162,917 

2019 
Total 
£ 

25,000 
25,000 
279,309 
329,309 

12,500 
25,000 
45,000 
69,167 
- 
151,667 

461,742 

50,000 

21,103 

532,845 

480,976 

~ John Banks resigned 14 April 2020 
* John Spellman appointed 4 May 2020 

Approval 
This report was approved by the Board of Directors on 3 March 2021 and signed on its behalf by:   

Alan Clarke 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee 
3 March 2021 

Page | 25  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RISK AND GOVERNANCE 

DIRECTORS’ REPORT 

The  Directors  present  their  annual  report  and  the  audited 
financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2020. 

Principal regulated activities 
The principal activities of the Group are the provision of asset 
and  personal  finance,  investing  activities,  foreign  exchange 
brokerage services and wealth management. 

The Bank, a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company, holds a 
Class 1(1) deposit taking licence issued under Part 2 of the Isle 
of  Man  Financial  Services  Act  2008.  Deposits  made  with  the 
Bank are covered by the Isle of Man Depositors’ Compensation 
Scheme contained in the Banking Business (Compensation of 
Depositors) Regulations 1991.  

CFL is authorised by the FCA to conduct brokerage services. 

EAL is authorised by the FSA under section 7 of the Financial 
Services Act 2008 to conduct investment business as a Class 
2, sub-classes (3), (6) and (7) licence holder.  

Results and dividends 
The proposed transfers to and from reserves are as set out in 
the Statement of Changes in Equity on page 40.  

Going Concern 
The Group has recognised a profit for the year after taxation of 
£1,968,000  (2019:  £2,673,000).  As  at  the  year  ended  31 
December  2020,  the  Bank  had  a  total  capital  ratio  of  19.1% 
which exceeded the regulatory minimum requirement of 15.0%. 
Based  on  these  factors,  management  has  a  reasonable 
expectation  that  the  Group  has  and  will  have  adequate 
resources 
the 
foreseeable future. 

in  operational  existence 

to  continue 

for 

Accordingly, the Directors continue to adopt the going concern 
basis in preparing the financial statements. 

Share capital 
Particulars  of  the  authorised  and  issued  share  capital  of  the 
Company are set out in note 28 to the financial statements.  

Significant shareholdings 
The  number of shares held and the percentage  of the  issued 
shares which that number represented as at 2 March 2021 are: 
% of 
issued capital 

Number 

Jim Mellon1 
Gregory Bailey2 
Euroclear Nominees Limited3 
Lynchwood Nominees Limited 
Island Farms Limited 
Rock (Nominees) Limited 
Chase Nominees Limited 

21,492,232 
17,835,750 
17,039,623 
6,313,960 
4,222,319 
4,198,917 
3,855,000 

18.83 
15.63 
14.93 
5.53 
3.70 
3.68 
3.38 

Directors and Directors’ share interests 
Details of current Directors are set out on pages 19 and 20. 

Jim Mellon1 
Gregory Bailey2 
David Gibson4 
Douglas Grant 
Alan Clarke 

Number 
02/03/21 
21,492,232 
17,835,750 
1,721,433 
505,821 
52,149 

Number 
31/12/20 
21,492,232 
17,835,750 
1,721,433 
505,821 
52,149 

Number 
31/12/19 
21,492,232 
17,835,750 
1,721,433 
505,821 
52,149 

1  Burnbrae Limited holds 19,164,250 Ordinary Shares. Burnbrae 
Limited  is  100%  beneficially  owned  by  Jim  Mellon.    Denham 
Eke,  CEO  of  MFG  is  also  a  director  of  Burnbrae  Limited.  
Pershing Nominees Limited holds 166,666 Ordinary Shares and 
Vidacos Nominees Limited holds 1,468,666 Ordinary Shares in 
trust for Jim Mellon and 692,650 Ordinary Shares are held in his 
own name. 

2  Vidacos Nominees Limited holds 17,835,750  Ordinary  Shares 

in trust for Gregory Bailey. 

3  Euroclear Nominees Limited holds 17,039,623 Ordinary Shares 

in trust for Aeternitas Imperium Privatstiftung. 

4  Comprises  1,721,433  Ordinary  Shares  held  by  Interactive 

Investor Services Limited for the benefit of David Gibson. 

The number of share options held by the current Directors is as 
follows:  

Douglas Grant* 

Number 
02/03/21 
700,000 

Number 
31/12/20 
700,000 

Number 
31/12/19 
1,042,466 

* 342,466 options expired on 25 June 2020. 

Directors’ liability insurance 
The  Group  maintains  insurance  cover  for  Directors’  potential 
liability. 

Fixed and intangible assets 
The movement in fixed and intangible assets during the year are 
set  out  in  notes  22  and  23  respectively  to  the  financial 
statements.  

Staff 
At 31 December 2020, there were 120 members of staff (2019: 
127), of whom 11 were part-time (2019: 14). 

Investment in subsidiaries 
Investments  in  the  Company’s  subsidiaries  are  disclosed  in 
note 30 to the financial statements.  

Auditor 
KPMG Audit LLC, being eligible, has expressed its willingness 
to continue in office.  

The number of shares held by the current Directors is as follows:  

Page | 26  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONTENTS 

  Page 

  Page 

Assurance 
Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 
Independent Auditor’s Report 

Consolidated and company financial statements 
Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss and Other 
Comprehensive Income 
Company  Statement  of  Profit  or  Loss  and  Other 
Comprehensive Income 
Consolidated Statement of Financial Position 
Company Statement of Financial Position 
Consolidated and Company Statement of Changes 
in Equity 
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows 
Company Statement of Cash Flows 

28 
29 

35 

37 

38 
39 
40 

41 
42 

  Notes to the consolidated and company financial statements 
  Basis of preparation 

1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 

Reporting entity 
Basis of accounting 
Functional and presentation currency 
Use of judgements and estimates 

Financial risk review and fair value 
5.       Financial instruments – Classification 
6. 
7. 

Financial instruments – Fair values 
Financial risk review 

Operating segments 
Net interest income 
Net fee and commission income  
Personnel expenses 

Performance for the year 
8. 
9. 
10. 
11. 
12.  Other expenses 
Impairment  on 
13. 
customers 

loans  and  advances 

to 

14.  Profit before tax payable 
15. 
Income tax expense 
16.  Earnings per share 

  Assets 

17.  Cash and cash equivalents  
18.  Debt securities 
19.  Financial assets 
20.  Loans and advances to customers 
21.  Trade and other receivables 
22.  Property,  plant  and  equipment  and  right-of-

use assets 
Intangible assets 

23. 

Liabilities and equity 
24.  Deposits from customers 
25.  Creditors and accrued charges 
26.  Loan notes 
27.  Pension liability 
28.  Called up share capital 

  Group composition 

29.  List of associates 
30.  List of subsidiaries 
31.  Acquisition of subsidiary 
32.  Goodwill 
33. 

Investment in Group undertakings 

  Other information 

34.  Related parties transactions 
35.  Leases 
36.  Subsequent events 
37.  Financial risk management 

  Accounting policies 

38.  Basis of measurement 
39.  Significant accounting policies 

43 
43 
43 
43 

43 
43 
46 

52 
53 
53 
54 
54 
54 

54 
55 
55 

56 
56 
57 
57 
58 
59 

60 

60 
60 
60 
61 
63 

64 
64 
65 
67 
67 

68 
69 
70 
71 

73 
74 

Page | 27  

 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES 

responsible 

The  Directors  are 
for  keeping  adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the 
Parent Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy  at  any  time  the  financial  position  of  the  Parent 
Company  and  enable  them  to  ensure  that  its  financial 
statements comply with the Isle of Man Companies Act 2006.   

They  are  responsible  for  such  internal  control  as  they 
determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial 
statements that are free from material misstatement, whether 
due to fraud or error, and have general responsibility for taking 
such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the 
assets of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and other 
irregularities.   

The  Directors  are  responsible  for  the  maintenance  and 
integrity of the corporate and financial information included on 
the  Company’s  website.    Legislation  in  the  Isle  of  Man 
governing  the  preparation  and  dissemination  of  financial 
statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report 
and  the  Group  and  Parent  Company  financial  statements  in 
accordance with applicable law and regulations.   

The  Directors  are  required  to  prepare  Group  and  Parent 
Company  financial  statements  for  each  financial  year.    As 
required by the AIM Rules of the London Stock Exchange they 
are  required  to  prepare  the  Group  financial  statements  in 
accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards 
(“IFRSs”)  as  adopted  by  the  EU,  as  applicable  to  an  Isle  of 
Man Company and applicable law and have elected to prepare 
the Parent Company financial statements on the same basis. 

The  Directors  must  not  approve  the  financial  statements 
unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of 
the state of affairs of the Group and Parent Company and of 
their  profit  or  loss  for  that  period.    In  preparing  each  of  the 
Group  and  Parent  Company 
the 
Directors are required to:  

financial  statements, 

  select  suitable accounting  policies and  then apply  them 

consistently;   

  make  judgements  and  estimates  that  are  reasonable, 

relevant and reliable;   

  state  whether  they  have  been  prepared  in  accordance 

with IFRSs as adopted by the EU;   

  assess  the  Group  and  Parent  Company’s  ability  to 
continue  as  a  going  concern,  disclosing,  as  applicable, 
matters related to going concern; and   

  use  the  going  concern  basis  of  accounting  unless  they 
either  intend  to  liquidate  the  Group  or  the  Parent 
Company  or  to  cease  operations  or  have  no  realistic 
alternative but to do so.   

Page | 28  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Our opinion is unmodified 
We have audited the consolidated financial statements of Manx Financial Group PLC (the “Company”) and its subsidiaries (together, 
the "Group"), for the year ended 31 December 2020 which comprise the Consolidated and Parent Company Statements of Profit or Loss 
and  Other  Comprehensive  Income,  the  Consolidated  and  Parent  Company  Statements  of  Financial  Position,  the  Consolidated  and 
Parent  Company  Statements of  Cash  Flows  and  the  Consolidated  and  Parent  Company  Statements  of  Changes  in  Equity,  and  the 
related notes, including the accounting policies in note 39. 

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated financial statements: 

 

 
 

give a true and fair view of the state of the Group's and of the Company's affairs as at 31 December 2020 and of the Group's 
and of the Company's profit for the year then ended; 
have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the EU; and 
have been properly prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Isle of Man Companies Act 2006. 

Basis for opinion 
We  conducted  our  audit  in  accordance  with  International  Standards  on  Auditing  (UK)  (“ISAs  (UK)”)  and  applicable  law.  Our 
responsibilities are described below. We have fulfilled our ethical responsibilities under, and are independent of the Company and Group 
in accordance with, UK ethical requirements including FRC Ethical Standards, as applied to listed entities. We believe that the audit 
evidence we have obtained is a sufficient and appropriate basis for our opinion. 

Key audit matters: our assessment of the risks of material misstatement 
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in the audit of the consolidated financial 
statements  and  include  the  most  significant  assessed  risks  of  material  misstatement  (whether  or  not  due  to  fraud)  identified  by  us, 
including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the 
efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the consolidated financial statements as a 
whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.  In arriving at our audit opinion 
above, the key audit matters were as follows. (These are unchanged from 2019 except for the key audit matter regarding VAT receivable, 
which is not included in the current year as the receivable amount has been received following agreement with Isle of Man Customs & 
Excise Division). 

and 

advances 

Key audit matter 
Loan 
customers – wholesale funding 
to 
Loans 
customers  £32,509,000  (2019: 
£40,491,000) 

advances 

and 

to 

Impairment 
£1,226,000 (2019: £536,000) 

Provision 

Refer  to  the  Audit,  Risk  and 
Compliance 
Committee 
(“ARCC”) Report, note 4 (Use of 
Judgements  and  Estimates  - 
Assumptions  and  Estimation 
Uncertainties), note 7(A) (Credit 
Risk),  note  13  (Impairment  on 
Loans 
to 
Customers), note 20 (Loans and 
Advances  to  Customers),  note 
37 
Risk 
Management  –  Credit  risk)  and 
(Accounting 
note 
Policy 
of 
for 
Financial Instruments). 

and  Advances 

Impairment 

(Financial 

39(G)(vii) 

(B) 

to  calculate 

impairment  using 

The risk    
Subjective estimate 
The  entity  is  required  by  the  financial  reporting 
the 
framework 
expected credit loss model. Impairment is measured 
on an instrument by instrument basis except where 
instruments  are  grouped,  for  impairment  to  be 
measured on a collective basis. Wholesale Funding 
comprises  Block  Finance,  Wholesale  Funding 
Agreements  and  Stocking  Plans.  These  books 
comprise  individually  significant  loan  balances  and 
are  in  the  nature  of  a  secured  business  loan.  The 
security is principally an underlying pool of loans. 

Loan impairment provisions reflect estimates of the 
amount and timing of future recoveries which require 
an assessment of matters such as future economic 
conditions and the value of collateral. Estimates, by 
their  nature,  give  rise  to  a  higher  risk  of  material 
misstatement due to error or fraud. 

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk 
assessment,  we  determined  that  the  impairment 
provision  has  a  high  degree  of  estimation 
uncertainty, including increased uncertainty from the 
impact of COVID 19 on the economy with a potential 
range  of  reasonable  outcomes  greater  than  our 
materiality  for  the  financial  statements  as  a  whole, 
and possibly many times that amount. 

Our response 
Our audit procedures included: 

Internal Controls: 
Understanding 
the 
origination  of  wholesale  funding  loans,  including 
borrower due diligence. 

in  respect  of 

the  controls 

of 

impairment  process  such  as 

Understanding the controls in respect of the Group’s 
timely 
loan 
recognition 
the 
impairment 
completeness  and  accuracy  of  reports  used  in  the 
loan  impairment  process  and  management  review 
processes  over  the  calculation  of  expected  credit 
losses. 

provisions, 

the 

Test of details: 
We  agreed  the  specific  (instrument  by  instrument) 
provisions  included  in  the  financial  statements  to 
Group’s  provisioning  schedule  and  evaluated 
whether  this  schedule  was correctly  extracted  from 
the  loans  and  advances  system,  including  the 
arrears information. 

We  tested  all  specific  (instrument  by  instrument) 
included  challenging  Group’s 
provisions.  This 
assessment of the specific provision, taking account 
of  such  factors  as:  amount  of  arrears;  financial 
standing  of  the  business  –  by  inspecting  latest 
accounts;  status  of  underlying  security 
–  by 
inspecting a sample of security documentation; and 
likelihood of recovery of any personal guarantees – 
by  agreeing  to  the  personal  guarantee  agreement 
and assessing  supporting evidence  of  the ability  of 
the guarantor to meet their obligations. 

Page | 29  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Key audit matter 

The risk    

and 

advances 

Loan 
to 
customers  –  individual  finance 
agreements 
Loans 
to 
customers £160,634,000 (2019: 
£138,879,000) 

advances 

and 

Impairment 
Provision 
£5,895,000 (2019: £4,237,000)  

Refer to the ARCC Report, note 
4  (Use  of  Judgements  and 
Estimates  -  Assumptions  and 
Estimation  Uncertainties),  note 
7(A)  (Credit  Risk),  note  13 
(Impairment  on  Loans  and 
Advances  to  Customers),  note 
20  (Loans  and  Advances  to 
Customers), 
(B) 
(Financial  Risk  Management  – 
Credit  risk)  and  note  39(G)(vii) 
for 
(Accounting 
Impairment 
Financial 
Instruments). 

Policy 

note 

37 

of 

to  calculate 

impairment  using 

Subjective estimate 
The  entity  is  required  by  the  financial  reporting 
framework 
the 
expected credit loss model. Impairment is measured 
on an instrument by instrument basis except where 
instruments  are  grouped,  for  impairment  to  be 
measured  on  a  collective  basis.  Individual  finance 
agreements  include  hire  purchase  finance  leases 
and unsecured loans to individuals and companies. 
Any security is typically the specific assets financed. 

Loan impairment provisions reflect estimates of the 
amount and timing of future recoveries which require 
an assessment of matters such as future economic 
conditions and the value of collateral. Estimates, by 
their  nature,  give  rise  to  a  higher  risk  of  material 
misstatement due to error or fraud. 

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk 
assessment,  we  determined  that  the  impairment 
provision  has  a  high  degree  of  estimation 
uncertainty, including increased uncertainty from the 
impact of COVID-19 on the economy with a potential 
range  of  reasonable  outcomes  greater  than  our 
materiality  for  the  financial  statements  as  a  whole, 
and possibly many times that amount. 

Our response 
Historical comparison: 
We  challenged  the  inputs  used  in  models  used  to 
measure 
impairment  on  a  collective  basis  by 
comparison  to  default  and  recovery  experience 
across each of the loan finance categories. 

Assessing disclosures: 
Assessing the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures 
about the degree of estimation uncertainty involved 
at  arriving at  the provisions  in  accordance  with  the 
relevant  financial  reporting  framework  and  specific 
circumstances of the Group. 
Our audit procedures included: 

Internal Controls: 
Understanding 
the 
origination  of  individual  finance  loans,  including 
borrower due diligence. 

in  respect  of 

the  controls 

of 

impairment  process  such  as 

Understanding  controls  in  respect  of  the  Group’s 
timely 
loan 
recognition 
the 
impairment 
completeness  and  accuracy  of  reports  used  in  the 
loan  impairment  process  and  management  review 
processes  over  the  calculation  of  expected  credit 
losses. 

provisions, 

the 

Use of KPMG Specialists: 
We  involved  KPMG  specialists  to  examine  the 
methodology  of  the  Group’s  expected  credit  loss 
model  and  its  compliance  with  the  requirements  of 
accounting standards. 

Test of details: 
We  agreed  the  specific  (instrument  by  instrument) 
provisions  included  in  the  financial  statements  to 
Group’s  provisioning  schedule  and  evaluated 
whether  this  schedule  was correctly  extracted  from 
the  loans  and  advances  system,  including  the 
arrears information. 

We  tested  a  sample  of  specific  (instrument  by 
instrument)  provisions,  weighted 
towards  those 
against  individually  significant  impaired  loans.  This 
included  challenging  Group’s  assessment  of  the 
specific  provision,  taking  into  account  such  factors 
as: the number of repayments in arrears; the known 
whereabouts  of  the  hirer/lessee  and  of  the  assets 
under  finance;  and  the  amounts  received  under 
scheduled 
agreed 
repayments  under  the  original  agreement  are  no 
longer being met. 

repayment  plans,  where 

Historical comparison: 
We challenged the inputs used in models to measure 
impairment  on  a  collective  basis  and  considered 
whether those inputs reflected default and recovery 
experience  across  each  of 
finance 
categories. 

loan 

the 

Assessing disclosures: 
Assessing the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures 
about the degree of estimation uncertainty involved 
at  arriving at  the provisions  in  accordance  with  the 
relevant  financial  reporting  framework  and  specific 
circumstances of the Group. 

Page | 30  

 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Key audit matter 
Impairment  of  goodwill  and 
intangible assets   

Goodwill  
£4,412,000 (2019: £3,734,000)  
and Intangibles Assets  
£2,286,000 (2019: £2,293,000).  

The risk    
Forecast based valuation 
Goodwill  and  intangible  assets  are  significant  and 
the estimated recoverable amount of these balances 
is subjective due to the inherent uncertainty involved 
in forecasting and discounting future cash flows for 
the  goodwill  impairment  test  and  in  performing  a  
review  for  indicators  of  impairment  for  intangible 
assets. 

in 

Refer to the ARCC Report, note 
4  (Use  of  Judgements  and 
Estimates  -  Assumptions  and 
Estimation  Uncertainties),  note 
23  (Intangible  Assets),  note  33 
(Investment 
Group 
Undertakings),  39(A)  (Basis  for 
Consolidation  of  Subsidiaries 
Financial 
and 
the  Parent 
Statements  of 
Company), 
39(K) 
(Intangible Assets and Goodwill) 
and  note  39(L)  (Impairment  of 
Non-Financial Assets) 

Separate 

note 

of 

Recoverability 
Parent 
Company’s  subordinated  loans 
to 
in 
subsidiaries 

investment 

and 

loans 

Subordinated 
to 
subsidiaries  £7,728,000  (2019: 
£7,778,000)  and  investment  in 
subsidiaries £22,597,000 (2019: 
£17,822,000). 

(Investment 

Refer  to  the  ARCC  report,  note 
in  Group 
33 
Undertakings) 
note 
and 
39(A)(vi) 
(Separate  Financial 
Statements of the Company). 

Goodwill  and  intangible  assets  have  arisen  on  the 
Group’s acquisition of businesses including lenders, 
independent financial advisers and finance brokers. 

The effect of these matters is that, as part of our risk 
assessment, we determined that the value in use of 
goodwill has a high degree of estimation uncertainty, 
including  increased  uncertainty  from  the  impact  of 
COVID-19 on the economy with a potential range of 
reasonable outcomes greater than our materiality for 
the  financial  statements  as  a  whole.  The  financial 
statements 
the  sensitivity 
estimated by the Group. 

(note  32)  disclose 

(2019:  93%)  of 

Low risk, high value  
The  carrying  value  of 
the  Parent  Company’s 
subordinated loans to and investment in subsidiaries 
represents  88% 
the  Parent 
Company’s total assets. The assessment of carrying 
value is not at a high risk of significant misstatement 
or  subject  to  significant  judgement  as  the  carrying 
value is supported by the audited net asset value of 
the  subsidiaries.  However,  due  to  its  materiality  in 
financial 
the  context  of 
statements, this is considered to be the area that had 
the  greatest  effect  on  our  overall  Parent  Company 
audit. 

the  Parent  Company 

Our response 
Internal Controls: 
Understanding the controls in respect of the Group’s 
goodwill  and  intangibles  assets  impairment  review 
process such as the timely recognition of impairment 
provisions  and  the  completeness  and  accuracy  of 
reports used in the impairment review process. 

Evaluating experts engaged by management: 
We have evaluated the competence, capabilities and 
objectivity of the management’s expert; obtained an 
understanding  of  the  work  of  that  expert  and 
evaluated the appropriateness of that expert’s work 
as audit evidence for the valuation of goodwill. 

Use of KPMG Specialists: 
We  involved  KPMG  valuation  specialists  who have 
in 
tested  reasonableness  of 
particular  those  relating  to  each  cash  generating 
unit’s forecast revenue growth, profit margins and the 
valuation method used. 

the  assumptions 

Benchmarking assumptions: Comparing the group’s 
assumptions to externally derived data in relation to 
key  inputs  such  as  projected  economic  growth, 
competition, cost inflation and discount rates. 

Indictors of impairment for intangible assets: 
Analysing  latest  financial  data  for  the  business 
related  to  the  relevant  intangible  asset  to  assess 
whether there are any indicators of impairment, such 
as losses being made or a downturn in sales. 
Sensitivity  analysis:  Performing  headroom  analysis 
on the assumptions noted above. 

Assessing disclosures: 
Assessing the adequacy of the Group’s disclosures 
the 
about 
the  sensitivity  of 
impairment  assessment 
in  key 
assumptions  reflected  in  the  risks  inherent  in  the 
valuation of goodwill and intangible assets. 
Our audit procedures included: 

the  outcome  of 
to  changes 

Test of details: 
Comparing  the  carrying  amount  of  100%  of  the 
Parent  Company’s  loans  to  and  investments  in 
subsidiaries  with  the  relevant  subsidiaries’  balance 
sheet  to  identify  whether  their  financial  position 
supported 
the  Parent 
the  carrying  amount  of 
Company’s  loans  to  and  investments  in  those 
subsidiaries,  assessing  whether  those  subsidiaries 
have historically  been  profit-making  and evaluating 
budgeted forecasts in line with our knowledge of the 
entity. 

Our application of materiality and an overview of the scope of our audit 
Materiality for the consolidated financial statements as a whole was set at £82,000 (2019: £150,000), determined with reference to a 
benchmark of Group profit before tax (forecasted) of £2,044,000, of which it represents approximately 4% (2019: 5%). 

Page | 31  

 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Our application of materiality and an overview of the scope of our audit (continued) 
Materiality for the Parent Company financial statements as a whole was set at £82,000 (2019: £150,000), determined with reference to 
a benchmark of Parent Company total assets, but reduced to align with materiality for the Group financial statements. 

In line with our audit methodology, our procedures on individual account balances and disclosures were performed to a lower threshold, 
performance materiality, so as to reduce to an acceptable level the risk that individually immaterial misstatements in individual account 
balances add up to a material amount across the financial statements as a whole. Performance materiality for the Group was set at 75% 
(2019:  75%)  of  materiality  for  the  financial  statements  as  a  whole,  which  equates  to  £61,000  (2019:  £112,500).  We  applied  this 
percentage in our determination of performance materiality because we did not identify any factors indicating an elevated level of risk. 

We reported to the Audit Committee any corrected or uncorrected identified misstatements exceeding £4,000 (2019: £7,500), in addition 
to  other  identified  misstatements  that  warranted  reporting  on  qualitative  grounds.  Our  audit  of  the  Group  was  undertaken  to  the 
materiality level specified above, which has informed our identification of significant risks of material misstatement and the associated 
audit procedures performed in those areas as detailed above.  

The group audit team audits all components of the group except one component – Beer Swaps Limited which represents 1.4% of the 
Group’s total assets. Group reporting is received for this company, subject to a materiality level set by the group audit team. 

Detailed audit instructions were sent to the auditors of the component. These instructions covered the significant audit areas that should 
be  covered  by  these  audits  (which  included  the  relevant  risks  of  material  misstatement  detailed  above)  and  set  out  the  information 
required to be reported back to the group audit team. 

Going concern 
The Directors have prepared the consolidated financial statements on the going concern basis as they do not intend to liquidate the 
Group or the Company or to cease their operations, and as they have concluded that the Group and the Company's financial position 
means that this is realistic. They have also concluded that there are no material uncertainties that could have cast significant doubt over 
their ability to continue as a going concern for at least a year from the date of approval of the consolidated financial statements (the 
“going concern period"). 

In our evaluation of the Directors' conclusions, we considered the inherent risks to the Group and the Company's business model and 
analysed how those risks might affect the Group and the Company's financial resources or ability to continue operations over the going 
concern period. The risk that we considered most likely to affect the Group and the Company's financial resources or ability to continue 
operations  over  this  period  was  the  recoverability  of  financial  assets  subject  to  credit  risk  as  a  result  of  economic  downturn  due  to 
outbreak of COVID19. 

We  considered  whether  this  risk  could  plausibly  affect  the  liquidity  in  the  going  concern  period  by  comparing  severe,  but  plausible 
downside scenarios that could arise from this risk against the level of available financial resources indicated by the Company’s financial 
forecasts. 

We  considered  whether  the  going  concern  disclosure  in  the Directors’  Report  gives  a  full and  accurate  description  of  the  Directors' 
assessment of going concern. 

Our conclusions based on this work: 

  we consider that the Directors' use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the consolidated financial 

statements is appropriate; 

  we have not identified, and concur with the Directors' assessment that there is not, a material uncertainty related to events or 
conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group and the Company's ability to continue as a 
going concern for the going concern period; and 

  we found the going concern disclosure in the notes to the consolidated financial statements to be acceptable. 

However, as we cannot predict all future events or conditions and as subsequent events may result in outcomes that are inconsistent 
with judgements that were reasonable at the time they were made, the above conclusions are not a guarantee that the Group and the 
Company will continue in operation. 

Fraud and breaches of laws and regulations – ability to detect 
Identifying and responding to risks of material misstatement due to fraud 
To identify risks of material misstatement due to fraud (“fraud risks”) we assessed events or conditions that could indicate an incentive 
or pressure to commit fraud or provide an opportunity to commit fraud. Our risk assessment procedures included: 

 

 
 

enquiring of management as to the Group and the Company’s policies and procedures to prevent and detect fraud as well as 
enquiring whether management have knowledge of any actual, suspected or alleged fraud; 
reading minutes of meetings of those charged with governance; and 
using analytical procedures to identify any unusual or unexpected relationships. 

Page | 32  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Fraud and breaches of laws and regulations – ability to detect (continued) 
As required by auditing standards, we perform procedures to address the risk of management override of controls, in particular the risk 
that management may be in a position to make inappropriate accounting entries. On this audit we do not believe there is a fraud risk 
related to revenue recognition because the Group and the Company’s revenue streams are simple in nature with respect to accounting 
policy  choice,  and  are  easily  verifiable  to  external  data  sources  or  agreements  with  little  or  no  requirement  for  estimation  from 
management. We did not identify any additional fraud risks. 

We performed procedures including: 

 

 

Identifying journal entries and other adjustments to test based on risk criteria and comparing the identified entries to supporting 
documentation; and 
incorporating an element of unpredictability in our audit procedures. 

Identifying and responding to risks of material misstatement due to non-compliance with laws and regulations 
We identified areas of laws and regulations that could reasonably be expected to have a material effect on the consolidated financial 
statements  from  our  general  commercial  and  sector  experience  and  through  discussion  with  management  (as  required  by  auditing 
standards), and from inspection of the Company’s regulatory and legal correspondence and discussed with management the policies 
and procedures regarding compliance with laws and regulations. As the Company is regulated, our assessment of risks involved gaining 
an understanding of the control environment including the entity’s procedures for complying with regulatory requirements. 

The  Group  and  the  Company  are  subject  to  laws  and  regulations that  directly  affect  the consolidated financial statements  including 
financial reporting legislation and taxation legislation and we assessed the extent of compliance with these laws and regulations as part 
of our procedures on the related financial statement items. 

The Group and the Company are subject to other laws and regulations where the consequences of non-compliance could have a material 
effect on amounts or disclosures in  the  consolidated financial statements,  for instance through the  imposition  of fines or  litigation or 
impacts on the Group and of the Company’s ability to operate. We identified financial services regulation as being the area most likely 
to have such an effect, recognising the regulated nature of the Group and the Company’s activities and its legal form. Auditing standards 
limit the required audit procedures to identify non-compliance with these laws and regulations to enquiry of management and inspection 
of regulatory and legal correspondence, if any. Therefore, if a breach of operational regulations is not disclosed to us or evident from 
relevant correspondence, an audit will not detect that breach. 

Context of the ability of the audit to detect fraud or breaches of law or regulation 
Owing to the inherent limitations of an audit, there is an unavoidable risk that we may not have detected some material misstatements 
in the consolidated financial statements, even though we have properly planned and performed our audit in accordance with auditing 
standards. For example, the further removed non-compliance with laws and regulations is from the events and transactions reflected in 
the consolidated financial statements, the less likely the inherently limited procedures required by auditing standards would identify it.  

In addition, as with any audit, there remains a higher risk of non-detection of fraud, as this may involve collusion, forgery, intentional 
omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal controls. Our audit procedures are designed to detect material misstatement. 
We are not responsible for preventing non-compliance or fraud and  cannot be expected to  detect non-compliance with all laws and 
regulations. 

Other information 
The Directors are responsible for the other information. The other information comprises the information included in the annual report 
but does not include the consolidated financial statements and our auditor's report thereon. Our opinion on the consolidated financial 
statements does not cover the other information and we do not express an audit opinion or any form of assurance conclusion thereon. 

In connection with our audit of the consolidated financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, 
consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the consolidated financial statements or our knowledge obtained 
in the  audit, or otherwise appears  to be materially  misstated.  If, based on  the work we have performed,  we conclude  that  there  is a 
material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have nothing to report in this regard. 

Respective responsibilities 
Directors' responsibilities 
As explained  more  fully in their  statement set  out  on page 28,  the Directors are responsible for: the preparation of  the consolidated 
financial statements including being satisfied that they give a true and fair view; such internal control as they determine is necessary to 
enable  the  preparation  of  consolidated  financial statements  that  are  free from material  misstatement, whether due to  fraud  or error; 
assessing the Group and Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern; 
and using the going concern basis of accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or the Company or to cease operations, 
or have no realistic alternative but to do so.  

Page | 33  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT, TO THE MEMBERS OF MANX FINANCIAL 
GROUP PLC 

Respective responsibilities (continued) 
Auditor's responsibilities 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue our opinion in an auditor’s report. Reasonable assurance is a high level of 
assurance but does not guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement 
when  it  exists.  Misstatements  can  arise  from  fraud  or  error  and  are  considered  material  if,  individually  or  in  aggregate,  they  could 
reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of the consolidated financial statements.  

A fuller description of our responsibilities is provided on the FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. 

The purpose of this report and restrictions on its use by persons other than the Company's members, as a body 
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with section 80(C) of the Companies Act 2006. Our 
audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an 
auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone 
other than the Company and the Company’s members, as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed. 

KPMG Audit LLC 
Chartered Accountants 
Heritage Court 
41 Athol Street 
Douglas 
Isle of Man  
IM1 1LA    

3 March 2021 

Page | 34  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED  STATEMENT  OF  PROFIT  OR  LOSS  AND  OTHER 
COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 

For the year ended 31 December  

Notes 

Interest income 
Interest expense 

Net interest income 

Fee and commission income 
Fee and commission expense 
Depreciation on leasing assets 

Net trading income 

Other operating income 
Gain / (loss) on financial instruments 
Realised gains on debt securities 
Revaluation on acquisition of subsidiary 

Operating income 

Personnel expenses  
Other expenses 
Impairment on loans and advances to customers 
Depreciation 
Amortisation and impairment of intangibles 
Share of profit of equity accounted investees, net of tax 
VAT recovery 

Profit before tax payable 

Income tax expense 

Profit for the year  

9 

10 
10 
22 

19 
18 
31 

11 
12 
13  
22 
23 
29 
21 

14 

15 

2020 
£000 

20,692 
(5,222) 

2019 
£000 

22,320 
(4,391) 

15,470 

17,929 

3,865 
(3,481) 
(406) 

3,796 
(5,426) 
(333) 

15,448 

15,966 

200 
259 
261 
237 

388 
(1) 
179 
- 

16,405 

16,532 

(6,823) 
(3,707) 
(3,950) 
(490) 
(374) 
54 
906 

2,021 

(53) 

1,968 

(6,762) 
(4,135) 
(1,900) 
(305) 
(430) 
124 
(101) 

3,023 

(350) 

2,673 

Page | 35  

 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED  STATEMENT  OF  PROFIT  OR  LOSS  AND  OTHER 
COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (CONTINUED) 

For the year ended 31 December  

Notes 

Profit for the year  

Other comprehensive income:  

Items that will be reclassified to profit or loss  
Unrealised (loss) / gains on debt securities 

Items that will never be reclassified to profit or loss 
Actuarial loss on defined benefit pension scheme taken to equity 

2020 
£000 

1,968 

2019 
£000 

2,673 

18 

27 

(51) 

51 

(241) 

(128) 

Total comprehensive income for the period attributable to owners  

1,676 

2,596 

Profit attributable to: 
Owners of the Company 
Non-controlling interests 

Total comprehensive income attributable to: 
Owners of the Company 
Non-controlling interests 

Earnings per share – Profit for the year 
Basic earnings per share (pence) 
Diluted earnings per share (pence) 

Earnings per share – Total comprehensive income for the year 
Basic earnings per share (pence) 
Diluted earnings per share (pence) 

The notes on pages 43 to 85 form part of these financial statements.  

The Directors believe that all results derive from continuing activities. 

1,935 
33 
1,968 

1,643 
33 
1,676 

1.65 
1.37 

1.41 
1.19 

2,673 
- 
2,673 

2,596 
- 
2,596 

2.04 
1.66 

1.98 
1.62 

16 
16 

16 
16 

Page | 36  

 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

COMPANY STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE 
INCOME 

For the year ended 31 December  

Notes 

Dividend income 
Interest income 

Operating income 

Personnel expenses 
Administration expenses 
Depreciation expense 

Profit before tax payable 

Tax payable 

Profit for the year  

Total comprehensive income for the year 

The notes on pages 43 to 85 form part of these financial statements.  

The Directors believe that all results derive from continuing activities. 

14 

2020 
£000 

572 
522 

1,094 

(74) 
(122) 
(101) 

797 

- 

797 

797 

2019 
£000 

1,466 
564 

2,030 

(146) 
(100) 
(101) 

1,683 

- 

1,683 

1,683 

Page | 37  

 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 

As at 31 December  

Assets 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Debt securities 
Trading asset 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 
Property, plant and equipment 
Intangible assets 
Investment in associates 
Goodwill 

Total assets 

Liabilities 
Deposits from customers 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Contingent consideration 
Loan notes 
Pension liability 
Deferred tax liability 

Total liabilities 

Equity 
Called up share capital 
Profit and loss account 
Non-controlling interest 

Total equity 

Total liabilities and equity 

Notes 

2020 
£000 

2019 
£000 

17 
18 
19  
20 
21 
22 
23 
29 
32 

24 
25 
6(ii) 
26 
27 
15 

28 

34,053 
25,532 
4 
193,143 
2,170 
6,045 
2,286 
316 
4,412 

267,961 

218,285 
3,206 
672 
22,222 
944 
197 

245,526 

19,121 
3,230 
84 

22,435 

14,620 
46,792 
19 
179,370 
2,478 
3,299 
2,293 
282 
3,734 

252,887 

209,933 
2,972 
863 
15,971 
688 
141 

230,568 

20,732 
1,587 
- 

22,319 

267,961 

252,887 

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 3 March 2021 and signed on its behalf by: 

Jim Mellon 
Executive Chairman 

Denham Eke 
Chief Executive Officer 

Douglas Grant 
Group Finance Director 

The notes on pages 43 to 85 form part of these financial statements. 

Page | 38  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

COMPANY STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION 

As at 31 December  

Assets 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade and other receivables 
Amounts due from Group undertakings 
Property, plant and equipment 
Intangible assets 
Investment in subsidiaries 
Subordinated loans 

Total assets 

Liabilities 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Amounts due to Group undertakings 
Loan notes 

Total liabilities 

Equity 
Called up share capital 
Profit and loss account 

Total equity 

Total liabilities and equity 

The notes on pages 43 to 85 form part of these financial statements.  

Notes 

17 
21 
33 
22 

30 
33 

25 
33 
26 

28 

2020 
£000 

1,378 
309 
1,935 
354 
7 
22,597 
7,728 

34,308 

501 
2,297 
22,222 

25,020 

19,121 
(9,833) 

9,288 

34,308 

2019 
£000 

119 
231 
1,016 
450 
7 
17,822 
7,778 

27,423 

575 
775 
15,971 

17,321 

20,732 
(10,630) 

10,102 

27,423 

Page | 39  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED AND COMPANY STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 

Attributable to owners of the Company 

Group 

Balance as at 1 January 2019 

Profit for the year  
Other comprehensive income 

Transactions with owners 

Balance as at 31 December 2019 

20,732 

Profit for the year 

Other comprehensive income 

Transactions with owners 
Changes in ownership interests 
Acquisition  of 
controlling interest 

subsidiary  with  non-

- 

- 

(1,611) 

- 

Share 
capital 
£000 

20,732 

Profit and 
loss account 
£000 

(1,009) 

- 
- 

- 

2,673 

(77) 

- 

1,587 

1,935 

Total 
£000 

19,723 

2,673 
(77) 

- 

22,319 

1,935 

(292) 

(292) 

- 

- 

(1,611) 

- 

Non-
controlling 
interests 
£000 

- 

- 
- 

- 

- 

33 

- 

- 

51 

84 

Balance as at 31 December 2020 

19,121 

3,230 

22,351 

Company 

Balance as at 1 January 2019 

Profit for the year 

Transactions with owners 

Balance as at 31 December 2019 

Profit for the year 

Transactions with owners 
Changes in ownership interests 

Balance as at 31 December 2020 

The notes on pages 43 to 85 form part of these financial statements. 

Total  
equity 
£000 

19,723 

2,673 
(77) 

- 

22,319 

1,968 

(292) 

(1,611) 

51 

22,435 

Total  
equity 
£000 

8,419 

1,683 

- 

Share 
Capital 
£000 

Profit and 
loss 
account 
£000 

20,732 

(12,313) 

- 

- 

1,683 

- 

20,732 

(10,630) 

10,102 

- 

797 

797 

(1,611) 

19,121 

- 

(9,833) 

(1,611) 

9,288 

Page | 40  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS 

For the year ended 31 December 

RECONCILIATION OF PROFIT BEFORE TAXATION TO OPERATING CASH FLOWS 

Profit before tax 

Adjustments for: 
Depreciation 
Amortisation and impairment of intangibles 
Share of profit of equity accounted investees 
Contingent consideration interest expense 
Pension charge included in personnel expenses 
Gain on financial instruments 
Revaluation on acquisition of subsidiary 

Changes in: 
Trading asset 
Trade and other receivables 
Creditors and accrued charges 

Net cash flow from trading activities 

Changes in: 
Loans and advances to customers 
Deposits from customers 
Pension contribution 

Cash (outflow) / inflow from operating activities 

CASH FLOW STATEMENT 

Cash from operating activities 
Cash (outflow) / inflow from operating activities 
Income taxes paid 

Net cash (outflow) / inflow from operating activities 

Cash flows from investing activities 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 
Purchase of intangible assets 
Sale of tangible fixed assets 
Acquisition of subsidiary or associate, net of cash acquired 
Sale / (purchase) of debt securities  
Contingent consideration 

Net cash inflow / (outflow) from investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities 
Receipt of loan notes 
Payment of lease liabilities (capital) 
Decrease in borrowings from block creditors 

Net cash inflow / (outflow) from financing activities 

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January  

Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 

Included in cash flows are:  
Interest received – cash amounts 
Interest paid – cash amounts 

The notes on pages 43 to 85 form part of these financial statements.  

Notes 

2020 
£000 

2019 
£000 

2,021 

3,023 

22 
23 
29 
6(ii) 
27 
6(ii) 
31 

19 

27 

22 
23 
22 
31 
18 

26 
35 

896 
374 
(54) 
122 
15 
(253) 
(237) 

2,884 

15 
415 
315 

3,629 

638 
430 
(124) 
88 
17 
- 
- 

4,072 

1 
118 
144 

4,335 

(16,023) 
8,352 
- 

(4,042) 

(31,092) 
51,433 
(41) 

24,635 

(4,042) 
(172) 

(4,214) 

(1,187) 
(231) 
127 
(648) 
21,209 
(59) 

19,211 

4,640 
(204) 
- 

4,436 

19,433 

14,620 

34,053 

20,274 
(5,053) 

24,635 
(379) 

24,256 

(1,634) 
(132) 
107 
(1,337) 
(16,207) 
- 

(19,203) 

100 
(148) 
(138) 

(186) 

4,867 

9,753 

14,620 

21,441 
(4,251) 

Page | 41  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

COMPANY STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS  

For the year ended 31 December 

RECONCILIATION OF PROFIT BEFORE TAXATION TO OPERATING CASH FLOWS 

Profit before tax 

Adjustments for: 
Depreciation 
Dividend declared 

Changes in: 
Amounts due from group undertakings 
Trade and other receivables 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Amounts due from / (to) Group undertakings 

Cash inflow / (outflow) from operating activities  

CASH FLOW STATEMENT 

Cash from operating activities 
Cash outflow from operating activities 
Income taxes paid 

Net cash inflow / (outflow) from operating activities 

Cash flows from investing activities 
Dividend received 
Investment in subsidiaries 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 
Purchase of intangible assets 

Net cash outflow from investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities 
Receipt of loan notes 
Receipt of subordinated loan 
Payment of finance lease liability 

Net cash inflow from financing activities 

Net increase / (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January  

Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 

The notes on pages 43 to 85 form part of these financial statements.  

Notes 

2020 
£000 

2019 
£000 

797 

1,683 

22 

30 

26 

101 
(572) 

326 

(347) 
(78) 
17 
1,522 

1,440 

1,440 
- 

1,440 

- 
(4,775) 
(5) 
- 

(4,780) 

4,640 
50 
(91) 

4,599 

1,259 

119 

1,378 

101 
(1,466) 

318 

- 
(199) 
98 
(595) 

(378) 

(378) 
- 

(378) 

450 
(1,650) 
- 
(7) 

(1,207) 

100 

(42) 

58 

(1,527) 

1,646 

119 

Page | 42  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

1.  Reporting entity 
Manx Financial Group PLC (“Company”) is a company incorporated in the Isle of Man. The consolidated financial statements of the 
Company for the year ended 31 December 2020 comprise the Company and its subsidiaries (“Group”).  

2.  Basis of accounting 
The  consolidated  and  the  separate  financial  statements  of  the  Company  have  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  International 
Financial  Reporting  Standards  (“IFRS”)  as  adopted  by  the  European  Union  (“EU”)  and  International  Financial  Reporting 
Interpretations Committee (“IFRIC”) interpretations applicable to companies reporting under IFRS, including International Accounting 
Standards (“IAS”), on a going concern basis as disclosed in the Directors’ Report.  

3.  Functional and presentation currency 
These financial statements are presented in pounds sterling, which is the Group’s functional currency. All amounts have been rounded 
to the nearest thousand, unless otherwise indicated. All subsidiaries of the Group have pounds sterling as their functional currency.  

4.  Use of judgements and estimates 
The  preparation  of  financial  statements  requires  management  to  make  judgements,  estimates  and  assumptions  that  affect  the 
application of accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Actual results may differ from 
these estimates. 

The extent to which COVID-19 impacts the Group’s business will depend on the effectiveness of government containment actions 
and the effectiveness of government and central bank stimulus measures. As the economic environment remains uncertain, actual 
results may differ from the estimates below. 

Estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the 
period in which the estimate is revised and in any future periods affected.  

Assumptions and estimation uncertainties 
Information  about  assumptions  and  estimation  uncertainties  at  year-end  that  have  a  significant  risk  of  resulting  in  a  material 
adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities in the next financial year is included in the following notes: 

  Note 21 – measurement of VAT receivable: key assumptions underlying carrying amount; 
  Note 27 – measurement of defined benefit obligations: key actuarial assumptions; 
  Note 23 and 32 – impairment test of intangible assets and goodwill: key assumptions underlying recoverable amounts; 
  Note  39(G)(vii)  –  measurement  of  Expected  Credit  Loss  (“ECL”)  allowance  for  loans  and  advances  to  customers  and 
assessment of specific impairment allowances where loans are in default or arrears: key assumptions in determining the 
weighted-average loss rate; and 

  Note 6 – measurement of contingent consideration. 

5.  Financial instruments - Classification 
For description of how the Group classifies financial assets and liabilities, see note 39(G)(ii). 

The  following  table  provides  reconciliation  between  line  items  in  the  statement  of  financial  position  and  categories  of  financial 
instruments. 

31 December 2020 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Debt securities 
Trading assets 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 
Total financial assets 

Deposits from customers 
Creditor and accrued charges 
Loan notes 

Total financial liabilities 

Mandatorily 
at FVTPL 
£000 

Designated 
as at FVTPL 
£000 

FVOCI – 
debt 
instruments 
£000 

FVOCI – 
equity 
instruments 
£000 

- 
- 
4 
- 
- 
4 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
25,532 
- 
- 
- 
25,532 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

Amortised 
cost 
£000 

34,053 
- 
- 
193,143 
2,170 
229,366 

218,285 
3,206 
22,222 

Total 
carrying 
amount 
£000 

34,053 
25,532 
4 
193,143 
2,170 
254,902 

218,285 
3,206 
22,222 

243,713 

243,713 

Page | 43  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

5.  Financial instruments - Classification (continued) 

31 December 2019 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Debt securities 
Trading assets 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 
Total financial assets 

Deposits from customers 
Creditor and accrued charges 
Block creditors 
Loan notes 

Total financial liabilities 

Mandatorily 
at FVTPL 
£000 

Designated 
as at FVTPL 
£000 

FVOCI –  
debt 
instruments 
£000 

FVOCI – 
equity 
instruments 
£000 

Amortised 
cost 
£000 

- 
- 
19 
- 
- 
19 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
46,792 
- 
- 
- 
46,792 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

14,620 
- 
- 
179,370 
2,478 
196,468 

209,933 
2,972 
- 
15,971 

228,876 

228,876 

Total 
carrying 
amount 
£000 

14,620 
46,792 
19 
179,370 
2,478 
243,279 

209,933 
2,972 
- 
15,971 

6.  Financial instruments – Fair values 
For description of the Group’s fair value measurement accounting policy, see note 39(G)(vi). 

The following table shows the carrying amounts and fair values of financial assets and financial liabilities, including their levels in the 
fair value hierarchy. It does not include fair value information for financial assets and financial liabilities not measured at fair value if 
the carrying amount is a reasonable approximation of fair value. 

31 December 2020 

Financial assets measured at fair value 
Debt securities 
Trading assets 

Financial assets not measured at fair value 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 
Investment in associate 

Financial liabilities measured at fair value 
Contingent consideration 

Financial liabilities  not measured at fair value 
Deposits from customers 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Loan notes 

Carrying 
amount 
Total 
£000 

Fair value 

Level 1 
£000 

Level 2 
£000 

Level 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

25,532 
4 
25,536 

25,532 
4 
25,536 

34,053 
193,143 
2,170 
316 
229,682 

672 
672 

218,285 
3,206 
22,222 

243,713 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

25,532 
4 
25,536 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

672 
672 

672 
672 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

Page | 44  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

6.  Financial instruments – Fair values (continued) 

31 December 2019 

Financial assets measured at fair value 
Debt securities 
Trading assets 

Financial assets not measured at fair value 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Loans and advances to customers 
Trade and other receivables 
Investment in associate 

Financial liabilities measured at fair value 
Contingent consideration 

Financial liabilities not measured at fair value 
Deposits from customers 
Creditors and accrued charges 
Block creditors 
Loan notes 

Measurement of fair values 
i. Valuation techniques and significant unobservable inputs  
Type 

Valuation technique 

Debt securities 

Contingent consideration 

Market comparison/discounted 
cash  flow:  The  fair  value  is 
estimated  considering  a  net 
present value calculated using 
discount  rates  derived  from 
quoted yields of securities with 
similar  maturity  and  credit 
rating  that are traded in active 
markets. 
Discounted  cash  flows:  The 
valuation  model  considers  the 
present  value  of  the  expected 
future  payments,  discounted 
using  a  risk-adjusted  discount 
rate. 

Carrying 
amount 
Total 
£000 

Fair value 

Level 1 
£000 

Level 2 
£000 

Level 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

46,792 
19 
46,811 

46,792 
19 
46,811 

14,620 
179,370 
2,478 
282 
196,750 

863 
863 

209,933 
2,972 
- 
15,971 
228,876 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

46,792 
19 
46,811 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

863 
863 

863 
863 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

Significant 
inputs 

unobservable 

Not applicable. 

Inter-relationship 
between 
significant unobservable inputs 
and fair value measurement 
Not applicable. 

Expected cash flows £790,869 
(2019: £1,199,701) 

Risk-adjusted  discount 
14% (2019: 16%) 

rate  

The estimated fair value would 
increase (decrease) if: 
-the expected cash flows were 
higher (lower); or 
-the risk-adjusted discount rate 
were lower (higher).  

Page | 45  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

6.  Financial instruments – Fair values (continued) 
ii. Level 3 recurring fair values 
Reconciliation of Level 3 fair values 
The following table shows a reconciliation from the opening balances to the closing balances for Level 3 fair values. 

Balance at 1 January 

Assumed in a business combination (see note 31) 

Finance costs 
Net change in fair value (unrealised) 

Payment 
Balance at 31 December 

2020 
£000 

863 

- 

122 
(253) 
(131) 

(60) 
672 

2019 
£000 

- 

775 

- 
88 
88 

- 
863 

Sensitivity analysis 
For the fair value of contingent consideration, reasonably possible changes at the reporting date to one of the significant unobservable 
inputs, holding other inputs constant would have the following effects. 

31 December 2020 

Expected cash flows (10% movement) 
Risk-adjusted discount rate (1% movement (100 bps)) 

Profit or loss 

Increase 

Decrease 

(66) 
7 

66 
(8) 

7.  Financial risk review 
Risk management 
This note presents information about the Group’s exposure to financial risks and the Group’s management of capital. For information 
on the Group’s financial risk management framework, see note 37.  

A. Credit risk 
For definition of credit risk and information on how credit risk is mitigated by the Group, see note 37. 

i. Credit quality analysis 
Loans and advances to customers 
Explanation of the terms ‘Stage 1’, ‘Stage 2’ and ‘Stage 3’ is included in note 39(G)(vii). 

An analysis of the credit risk on loans and advances to customers is as follows: 

2020 

2019 

Stage 1 
£000 

Stage 2 
£000 

Stage 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

  Stage 1 
£000 

Stage 2 
£000 

Stage 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

Grade A 
Grade B 
Grade C 
Gross value 

173,673 
- 
335 
174,008 

- 
5,728 
9 
5,737 

- 
7,751 
12,771 
20,522 

173,673 
13,479 
13,115 
200,267 

168,796 
1,143 
- 
169,939 

- 
1,675 
1,985 
3,660 

- 
- 
10,544 
10,544 

168,796 
2,818 
12,529 
184,143 

Allowance for impairment 
Carrying value 

(423) 
173,585 

(18) 
5,719 

(6,683) 
13,839 

(7,124) 
193,143 

(116) 
169,823 

(467) 
3,193 

(4,190) 
6,354 

(4,773) 
179,370 

Loans are graded A to C depending on the level of risk. Grade A relates to agreements with the lowest risk, Grade B with medium 
risk and Grade C relates to agreements with the highest of risk.  

Page | 46  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
A. Credit risk (continued) 
i. Credit quality analysis (continued) 
Loans and advances to customers (continued) 

The following table sets out information about the overdue status of loans and advances to customers in Stage 1, 2 and 3: 

31 December  

Current 
Overdue < 30 days 
Overdue > 30 days 

2020 

2019 

Stage 1 
£000 

Stage 2 
£000 

Stage 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

  Stage 1 
£000 

Stage 2 
£000 

Stage 3 
£000 

Total 
£000 

170,436 
3,572 
- 
174,008 

- 
- 
5,737 
5,737 

- 
- 
20,522 
20,522 

170,436 
3,572 
26,259 
200,267 

145,373 
24,259 
307 
169,939 

- 
- 
3,660 
3,660 

- 
- 
10,544 
10,544 

145,373 
24,259 
14,511 
184,143 

For Stage 3 loans and advances that are overdue for more than 30 days, the Bank holds collateral with a value of £13,362,468 (2019: 
£8,706,600) representing security cover of 65% (2019: 60%). 

Debt securities, cash and cash equivalents 
The following table sets out the credit quality of liquid assets:  

Government bonds and treasury bills 
Rated A to A+ 

Floating rate notes 
Rated A to A+ 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Rated A to A+ 

2020 
£000 

2019 
£000 

24,431 

44,690 

1,101 

2,102 

34,053 

59,585 

14,620 

61,412 

The analysis has been based on Standard & Poor’s ratings. 

ii. Collateral and other credit enhancements 
The Group holds collateral in the form of the underlying assets (typically private and commercial vehicles, plant and machinery) to 
loan arrangements as security for HP, finances leases, vehicle stocking plans, block discounting, wholesale funding arrangements, 
integrated wholesale funding arrangements and secured commercial loan balances, which are sub-categories of loans and advances 
to customers. In addition, the commission share schemes have an element of capital indemnified.  During 2020, 34.0% of loans and 
advances had an element of capital indemnification (2019: 25.5%).   

Estimates of fair value are based on the value of collateral assessed at the time of borrowing, and generally are not updated except 
when  a  loan  is  individually  assessed  as  impaired.  At  the  time  of  granting  credit  within  the  sub-categories  listed  above,  the  loan 
balances due are secured over the underlying assets held as collateral.  

iii. Amounts arising from ECL 
See accounting policy in note 39(G)(vii). 

IFRS 9 significantly overhauled the requirements and methodology used to assess credit impairments by transitioning to a forward-
looking  approach  based  on  an  expected  credit  loss  model.    The  new  impairment  model  applies  to  financial  assets  measured  at 
amortised cost, contract assets and debt investments at FVOCI, but not to investments in equity instruments.  Under IFRS 9, credit 
losses are recognised earlier than under IAS 39 – Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement. 

After a detailed review, the Group devised and implemented an impairment methodology in light of the IFRS 9 requirements outlined 
above noting the following: 

  A  Significant  Increase  in  Credit  Risk  (“SICR”)  is  always deemed  to  occur  when  the  borrower  is  30  days  past  due  on  its 
contractual  payments.    If  the  Group  becomes  aware  ahead  of  this  time  of  non-compliance  or  financial  difficulties  of  the 
borrower, such as loss of employment, avoiding contact with the Group then a SICR has also deemed to occur.  

  The  Group  has  granted  payment  holidays  to  customers  with  no  prior  arrears  based  on  individual  circumstances.  These 
customers are  not  able  to incur  further arrears as no payments are being called whilst they are on the  payment holiday. 
These customers have not been deemed to have a SICR unless the customer is under exceptional financial hardship due 
to COVID-19. 

Page | 47  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
A. Credit risk (continued) 
iii. Amounts arising from ECL (continued) 

  A receivable is always deemed to be in default and credit-impaired when the borrower is 90 days past due on its contractual 
payments  or  earlier  if  the  Group  becomes  aware  of  severe  financial  difficulties  such  as  bankruptcy,  individual  voluntary 
arrangements, abscond or disappearance, fraudulent activity or other similar events.  

  The  ECL  was  derived  by  reviewing  the  Group’s  loss  rate  and  loss-given-default  over  the  past  8  years  by  product  and 

geographical segment. 

  The Group has assumed that the future economic conditions will broadly mirror the current environment and therefore the 

forecasted loss levels in the next 3 years will match the Group’s experience in recent years. 

  For  portfolios  where  the  Group  has  never had  a  default  in  its  history  or  has  robust  credit  enhancements  such  as  credit 

insurance or default indemnities for the entire portfolio, then no IFRS 9 provision is made.   

  If the Group holds objective evidence through specifically assessing a credit-impaired receivable and believes it will go on 
to  completely recover the debt  due  to the collateral held  and cooperation with  the  borrower, then  no IFRS 9 provision  is 
made. 

There have been no significant changes to ECL assumptions from the prior year. 

iv. Concentration of credit risk 

Geographical 
Lending is restricted to individuals and entities with Isle of Man, UK or Channel Islands addresses.  

Segmental 
The Bank is exposed to credit risk with regard to customer loan accounts, comprising HP and finance lease balances, unsecured 
personal loans, secured commercial loans,  block discounting, vehicle stocking plan  loans and wholesale  funding agreements.   In 
addition, the Bank lends via significant introducers into the UK. There was no introducer that accounted for more than 20% of the 
Bank’s total lending portfolio at the end of 31 December 2020 (2019: more than 20%). 

B. Liquidity risk 
For the definition of liquidity risk and information on how liquidity risk is manged by the Group, see note 37. 

i. Exposure to liquidity risk 
The key measure used by the Group for managing liquidity risk is the ratio of net liquid assets to deposits from customers and short-
term funding. For this purpose, net liquid assets includes cash and cash equivalents and investment-grade debt securities for which 
there is an active and liquid market. 

Details of the reported Group ratio of net liquid assets to deposits from customers at the reporting date and during the reporting year 
were as follows: 

At 31 December  
Average for the year 
Maximum for the year 
Minimum for the year 

2020 
27% 
28% 
32% 
25% 

2019 
29% 
23% 
29% 
19% 

Page | 48  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
B. Liquidity risk (continued) 

ii. Maturity analysis for financial liabilities and financial assets 
The table below shows the Group’s financial liabilities classified by their earliest possible contractual maturity, on an undiscounted 
basis including interest due at the end of the deposit term. Based on historical data, the Group’s expected actual cash flow from these 
items vary from this analysis due to the expected re-investment of maturing customer deposits.  

Residual contractual maturities of financial liabilities as at the reporting date (undiscounted): 

31 December 2020 

Deposits  
Other liabilities 

Total liabilities 

31 December 2019 

Deposits  
Other liabilities 

Total liabilities 

3,106 
27 

3,133 

Sight- 
8 days 
£000 

2,900 
5,212 

8,112 

Sight-
8 days

£000  

>8 days 
- 1 month 
£000 

>1 month  
- 3 months 
£000 

>3 months 
- 6 months 
£000 

>6 months 
- 1 year 
£000 

3,194 
88 

3,282 

19,775 
668 

20,443 

53,380 
819 

54,199 

59,023 
3,630 

62,653 

>1 year
- 3 years
£000

61,491 
16,401 

77,892 

>3 years 
- 5 years 
£000 

25,221 
7,851 

33,072 

>8 days 
- 1 month 
£000 

>1 month  
- 3 months 
£000 

>3 months 
- 6 months 
£000 

>6 months 
- 1 year 
£000 

>1 year
- 3 years
£000

>3 years 
- 5 years 
£000 

5,127 
- 

5,127 

19,670 
4,765 

24,435 

40,315 
16 

40,331 

43,792 
7,281 

51,073 

77,746 
1,274 

22,397 
1,444 

79,020 

23,841 

Maturity of assets and liabilities at the reporting date: 

31 December 2020 

Assets 
Cash  
Debt securities 
Loans and advances 
Other assets 

Total assets 

Liabilities 
Deposits  
Other liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Sight- 
8 days 
£000 

>8 days 
- 1 month 
£000 

>1 month  
- 3 months 
£000 

>3 months 
- 6 months 
£000 

>6 months 
- 1 year 
£000 

>1 year 
- 3 years 
£000 

>3 years 
- 5 years 
£000 

34,053 
- 
6,270 
4 

40,327 

3,106 
- 

3,106 

- 
5,301 
7,750 
- 

13,051 

2,736 
- 

2,736 

- 
14,000 
21,565 
- 

35,565 

18,981 
450 

19,431 

- 
- 
17,822 
- 

17,822 

52,478 
496 

52,974 

- 
6,231 
27,490 
2,578 

36,299 

57,922 
2,983 

60,905 

- 
- 
84,111 
- 

84,111 

58,805 
14,874 

73,679 

- 
- 
25,756 
5,637 

31,393 

24,257 
7,297 

31,554 

>5 
years 
£000 

- 
1,141 

1,141 

>5 
years 
£000 

- 
2,180 

2,180 

>5 
years 
£000 

- 
- 
2,379 
7,014 

9,393 

- 
1,141 

1,141 

Total 
£000 

225,190 
30,625 

255,815 

Total 
£000 

211,947 
22,172 

234,119 

Total 
£000 

34,053 
25,532 
193,143 
15,233 

267,961 

218,285 
27,241 

245,526 

Page | 49  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
B. Liquidity risk (continued) 
ii. Maturity analysis for financial liabilities and financial assets (continued) 

Maturity of assets and liabilities at the reporting date (continued): 

31 December 2019 

Assets 
Cash  
Debt securities 
Loans and advances 
Other assets 

Total assets 

Liabilities 
Deposits  
Other liabilities 

Total liabilities 

Sight- 
8 days 
£000 

>8 days 
- 1 month 
£000 

>1 month 
- 3 months 
£000 

>3 months 
- 6 months 
£000 

>6 months 
- 1 year 
£000 

>1 year 
- 3 years 
£000 

>3 years 
- 5 years 
£000 

>5 
years 
£000 

14,620 
- 
12,564 
19 

27,203 

2,889 
5,250 

8,139 

- 
5,795 
2,017 
- 

7,812 

5,060 
- 

5,060 

- 
15,748 
12,652 
- 

28,400 

19,411 
4,710 

24,121 

- 
17,751 
14,977 
- 

32,728 

39,867 
- 

39,867 

- 
- 
32,615 
- 

32,615 

43,574 
7,245 

50,819 

- 
7,498 
77,077 
- 

84,575 

76,953 
900 

77,853 

- 
- 
27,461 
- 

27,461 

22,179 
350 

22,529 

- 
- 
7 
12,086 

12,093 

- 
2,180 

2,180 

iii. Liquidity reserves 
The following table sets out the components of the Group’s liquidity reserves: 

Balances with other banks 
Unencumbered debt securities 
Total liquidity reserves 

2020 
Carrying 
amount 
£000 

34,053 
25,532 
59,585 

2020  
Fair  
value 
£000 

34,053 
25,532 
59,585 

2019 
Carrying 
amount 
£000 

14,620 
46,792 
61,412 

Total 
£000 

14,620 
46,792 
179,370 
12,105 

252,887 

209,933 
20,635 

230,568 

2019  
Fair  
value 
£000 

14,620 
46,792 
61,412 

C. Market risk 
For the definition of market risk and information on how the Group manages the market risks of trading and non-trading portfolios, 
see note 37.  

The following table sets out the allocation of assets and liabilities subject to market risk between trading and non-trading portfolios: 

31 December 2020 

Assets subject to market risk 
Debt securities 
Trading assets 
Total 

31 December 2019 

Assets subject to market risk 
Debt securities 
Trading assets 
Total 

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

25,532 
4 
25,536 

Market risk measure 

Trading 
portfolios 
£000 

  Non-trading 
portfolios 
£000 

- 
4 
4 

25,532 
- 
25,532 

Market risk measure 

Carrying 
amount 
£000 

Trading 
portfolios 
£000 

46,792 
19 
46,811 

- 
19 
19 

Non-
trading 
portfolios 
£000 

46,792 
- 
46,792 

Page | 50  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
C. Market risk (continued) 

i. Exposure to interest rate risk  
The following tables present the interest rate mismatch position between assets and liabilities over the respective maturity dates. The 
maturity dates are presented on a worst-case basis, with assets being recorded at their latest maturity and deposits from customers 
at their earliest. 

31 December 2020 

  Sight- 
  1 month 
£000 

>1month 
- 3months 
£000 

>3months 
- 6months 
        £000 

 >6months
- 1 year 
  £000 

  >1 year  
- 3 years 
       £000 

 >3 years 
- 5 years 
       £000 

 >5 years 
       £000 

  Non-
Interest 
  Bearing 
  £000 

Total 
£000 

Assets 
34,053 
Cash & cash equivalents 
Debt securities 
5,301 
Loans and advances to customers  14,020 
- 
Other assets 

- 
14,000 
21,565 
- 

- 
- 
  17,822 
- 

- 
6,231 
  27,490 
- 

- 
- 
  84,111 
- 

- 
- 
  25,756 
- 

- 
- 
2,379 
- 

- 
- 
- 
15,233 

34,053 
25,532 
193,143 
15,233 

Total assets 

53,374 

  35,565 

  17,822 

  33,721 

  84,111 

  25,756 

2,379 

  15,233 

  267,961 

Liabilities and equity 
Deposits from customers 
Other liabilities 
Total equity 

Total liabilities and equity 

5,842 
- 
- 

5,842 

18,981 
450 
- 

  52,478 
496 
- 

  57,922 
280 
- 

  58,805 
  14,874 
- 

  24,257 
7,297 
- 

19,431 

  52,974 

  58,202 

  73,679 

  31,554 

- 
944 
- 

944 

- 
2,900 
22,435 

25,335 

218,285 
27,241 
22,535 

267,961 

Interest rate sensitivity gap 

47,532 

16,134 

  (35,152) 

  (24,481) 

  10,432 

(5,798) 

1,435 

(10,102) 

Cumulative 

47,532 

63,666 

  28,514 

4,033 

  14,465 

8,667 

  10,102 

- 

31 December 2019 

  Sight- 
  1 month 
£000 

>1month 
- 3months 
£000 

>3months 
- 6months 
        £000 

 >6months
- 1 year 
  £000 

  >1 year  
- 3 years 
       £000 

 >3 years 
- 5 years 
       £000 

 >5 years 
       £000 

  Non-
Interest 
  Bearing 
  £000 

- 

- 

Total 
£000 

Assets 
14,620 
Cash & cash equivalents 
Debt securities 
5,795 
Loans and advances to customers  14,581 
- 
Other assets 

- 
15,748 
12,652 
- 

- 
  17,751 
  14,977 
- 

- 
- 
  32,615 
- 

- 
7,498 
  77,077 
- 

- 
- 
  27,461 
- 

Total assets 

34,996 

  28,400 

  32,728 

  32,615 

  84,575 

  27,461 

Liabilities and equity 
Deposits from customers 
Other liabilities 
Total equity 

Total liabilities and equity 

7,949 
586 
- 

8,535 

19,411 
4,710 
- 

  39,867 
1,188 
- 

  43,574 
1,200 
- 

  76,953 
1,268 
- 

  22,179 
7,882 
- 

24,121 

  41,055 

  44,774 

  78,221 

  30,061 

Interest rate sensitivity gap 

26,461 

4,279 

(8,327) 

  (12,159) 

6,354 

(2,600) 

- 
- 
7 
- 

7 

- 
- 
- 

- 

7 

- 
- 
- 
12,105 

14,620 
46,792 
179,370 
12,105 

  12,105 

  252,887 

- 
3,801 
22,319 

26,120 

(14,015) 

209,933 
20,635 
22,319 

252,887 

- 

- 

Cumulative 

26,461 

30,740 

  22,413 

  10,254 

  16,608 

  14,008 

  14,015 

- 

The Bank monitors the impact of changes in interest rates on interest rate mismatch positions using a method consistent with the 
FSA required reporting standard. The methodology applies weightings to the net interest rate sensitivity gap in order to quantify the 
impact of an adverse change in interest rates of 2.0% per annum (2019: 2.0%). The following tables set out the estimated total impact 
of such a change based on the mismatch at the reporting date: 

31 December 2020 

Sight- 
  1 month 

>1month 
-3months 

>3months 
- 6months 

>6months 
  - 1 year 

>1 year  
- 3 years 

>3 years 
  - 5 years 

>5 years 

Interest rate sensitivity gap £000 47,532 

16,134 

(35,152) 

(24,481) 

10,432 

(5,798) 

Weighting 

£000 

- 

- 

0.003 

48 

0.007 

(246) 

0.014 

(343) 

0.027 

282 

0.054 

(313) 

1,435 

0.115 

165 

Non-
Interest 
  Bearing 

(10,102) 

- 

- 

Total 

- 

- 

(407) 

Page | 51  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

7.  Financial risk review (continued) 
Risk management (continued) 
C. Market risk (continued) 

i. Exposure to interest rate risk (continued) 

31 December 2019 

Sight- 
  1 month 

>1month 
-3months 

>3months 
- 6months 

>6months 
  - 1 year 

>1 year  
- 3 years 

>3 years 
  - 5 years 

  >5 years 

Non-
Interest 
  Bearing 

Interest rate sensitivity gap £000 

26,461 

Weighting 

£000 

0.000 

- 

4,279 

0.003 

13 

(8,327)

(12,159)

6,354  

(2,600)

7 

(14,015)

0.007 

(58)

0.014 

(170)

0.027  

0.054 

0.115 

0.000 

172  

(140) 

1 

- 

(182) 

Total 

- 

- 

D. Capital Management 
i. Regulatory capital 
The lead regulator of the Group’s wholly owned subsidiary, the Bank, is the FSA. The FSA sets and monitors capital requirements for 
the Bank. 

The Bank’s regulatory capital consists of the following elements. 

  Common  Equity  Tier  1  (“CET1”)  capital,  which  includes  ordinary  share  capital,  retained  earnings  and  reserves  after 

adjustment for deductions for goodwill, intangible assets and intercompany receivable. 

  Tier 2 capital, which includes qualifying subordinated liabilities and any excess of impairment over expected losses. 

The FSA’s approach to the measurement of capital adequacy is primarily based on monitoring the relationship of the capital resources 
requirement to available capital resources. The FSA sets individual capital guidance (“ICG”) for the Bank in excess of the minimum 
capital resources requirement. A key input to the ICG setting process is the Bank’s internal capital adequacy assessment process 
(“ICAAP”). 

The Bank is also regulated by the FCA in the UK for credit and brokerage related activities. 

ii. Capital allocation 
Management  uses  regulatory  capital  ratios  to  monitor  its  capital  base.  The  allocation  of  capital  between  specific  operations  and 
activities is, to a large extent, driven by optimisation of the return achieved on the capital allocated. The amount of capital allocated 
to each operation or activity is based primarily on regulatory capital requirements. 

8.  Operating segments 
Segmental information is presented in respect of the Group’s business segments. The Directors consider that the Group currently 
operates in one geographic segment comprising of the Isle of Man, UK and Channel Islands. The primary format, business segments, 
is based on the Group’s management and internal reporting structure. The Directors consider that the Group operates in three (2019: 
four)  product  orientated  segments  in  addition  to  its  investing  activities:  Asset  and  Personal  Finance  (including  provision  of  HP 
contracts,  finance  leases,  personal  loans,  commercial  loans,  block  discounting,  vehicle  stocking  plans  and  wholesale  funding 
agreements); EAL; and MFX.  

For the year ended 31 December 2020 

Net interest income 
Fee and commission income 
Operating income 

Profit / (loss) before tax payable 

Capital expenditure 

Total assets 
Total liabilities 

Asset and 
Personal 
Finance 
£000 

15,470 
430 
13,206 

1,316 

1,138 

260,155 
230,001 

Edgewater 
Associates 
£000 

Manx FX 
£000 

Investing
Activities 
£000 

- 
2,103 
2,103 

(94) 

46 

2,638 
660 

- 
1,332 
1,096 

1,096 

2 

536 
12 

- 
- 
- 

(297) 

1 

4,632 
14,853 

Total 
£000 

15,470 
3,865 
16,405 

2,021 

1,187 

267,961 
245,526 

Page | 52  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

8.  Operating segments (continued) 

For the year ended 31 December 2019 

Net interest income 
Fee and commission income 
Operating income / (loss) 

Profit / (loss) before tax payable 

Capital expenditure 

Total assets 
Total liabilities 

9.  Net interest income 

Asset and 
Personal 
Finance 
£000 

17,929 
439 
13,518 

2,944 

1,744 

249,449 
220,685 

Interest income 
Loans and advances to customers 
Total interest income calculated using the effective interest method 
Operating lease income  
Total interest income 

Interest expense 
Deposits from customers 
Loan note interest 
Lease liability 
Contingent consideration: interest expense 
Total interest expense 

Net interest income 

Manx 
Incahoot 
£000 

Edgewater 
Associates 
£000 

Manx 
FX 
£000 

Investing
Activities 
£000 

- 
(9) 
(10) 

(295) 

- 

14 
14 

- 
2,529 
2,529 

219 

14 

2,292 
1,022 

- 
837 
828 

502 

- 

321 
321 

Total 
£000 

17,929 
3,796 
16,865 

- 
- 
- 

(347) 

3,023 

8 

1,766 

811 
8,526 

252,887 
230,568 

2020 
£000 

19,484 
19,484 
1,208 
20,692 

(4,044) 
(1,016) 
(40) 
(122) 
(5,222) 

2019 
£000 

21,824 
21,824 
496 
22,320 

(3,383) 
(873) 
(47) 
(88) 
(4,391) 

15,470 

17,929 

10.  Net fee and commission income 
In the following table, fee and commission income from contracts with customers in the scope of IFRS 15 – Revenue from Contracts 
with  Customers  is  disaggregated  by  major  type  of  services.  The  table  includes  a  reconciliation  of  the  disaggregated  fee  and 
commission income with the Group’s reportable segments. 

Major service lines 
EAL: Independent financial advice income 
MFX: Foreign exchange trading income 
Asset and personal finance: Brokerage services income 
Fee and commission income 

Fee and commission expense 

Net fee and commission income / (expense) 

2020 
£000 

2,103 
1,332 
430 
3,865 

2019 
£000 

2,528 
837 
431 
3,796 

(3,481) 

(5,426) 

384 

(1,630) 

Page | 53  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

11.  Personnel expenses 

Staff gross salaries  
Executive Directors’ remuneration 
Non-executive Directors’ fees 
Executive Directors’ pensions 
Executive Directors’ performance related pay 
Staff pension costs 
National insurance and payroll taxes 
Staff training and recruitment costs 

12.  Other expenses 

Professional and legal fees 
Marketing costs 
IT costs 
Establishment costs 
Communication costs 
Travel costs 
Bank charges 
Insurance 
Irrecoverable VAT 
Other costs 

13.  Impairment on loans and advances to customers 
The charge in respect of specific allowances for impairment comprises: 

Specific impairment allowances made 
Reversal of allowances previously made 

Total charge for specific provision for impairment 

The charge in respect of collective allowances for impairment comprises:  

Collective impairment allowances made 
Release of allowances previously made 

Total (charge) / credit for collective allowances for impairment 

Total charge for allowances for impairment 

14.  Profit before tax payable 
The profit before tax payable for the year is stated after charging:  

Auditor’s remuneration:  

as Auditor current year 
 non-audit services 

Pension cost defined benefit scheme 
Operating lease rentals for property 

2020 
£000 

(5,331) 
(299) 
(163) 
(21) 
(50) 
(297) 
(606) 
(56) 

(6,823) 

2020 
£000 

(1,063) 
(177) 
(822) 
(270) 
(105) 
(95) 
(151) 
(300) 
(436) 
(288) 

(3,707) 

2020 
£000 

(6,833) 
3,039 

(3,794) 

2020 
£000 

(421) 
265 

(156) 

2019 
£000 

(5,142) 
(259) 
(152) 
(21) 
(50) 
(302) 
(628) 
(208) 

(6,762) 

2019 
£000 

(1,559) 
(261) 
(633) 
(286) 
(155) 
(219) 
(137) 
(199) 
(340) 
(346) 

(4,135) 

2019 
£000 

(2,091) 
64 

(2,027) 

2019 
£000 

(138) 
265 

127 

(3,950) 

(1,900) 

Group 

Company 

2020 
£000 

(167) 
(10) 
(16) 
(97) 

2019 
£000 

(110) 
(96) 
(17) 
(117) 

2020 
£000 

- 
- 
- 
- 

2019 
£000 

- 
- 
- 
- 

Page | 54  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

15.  Income tax expense 

Current tax expense 
Current year 
Changes to estimates for prior years 

Deferred tax expense 
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 
Utilisation of previously recognised tax losses 
Changes to estimates for prior years 

Tax expense  

Reconciliation of effective tax rate 
Profit before tax  
Tax using the Bank’s domestic tax rate 
Effect of tax rates in foreign jurisdictions 
Non-deductible expenses 
Timing difference in current year 
Origination and reversal of temporary differences in deferred tax 
Tax expense 

2020 
£000 

2,021 
(202) 
28 
- 
65 
56 
(53) 

(10.0%) 
1.4% 
0.0% 
3.2% 
2.8% 
(2.6%) 

2020 
£000 

3 
- 
3 

(56) 
- 
- 
(56) 

(53) 

(10.0)% 
(0.8)% 
(2.6)% 
0.0 % 
1.8 % 
(11.6)% 

2019 
£000 

(297) 

(297) 

(53) 
- 
- 
(53) 

(350) 

2019 
£000 

3,023 
(302) 
(23) 
(78) 
- 
53 
(350) 

The main rate of corporation tax in the Isle of Man is 0.0% (2019: 0.0%). However, the profits of the Group’s Isle of Man banking 
activities are taxed at 10.0% (2019: 10.0%). The profits of the Group’s subsidiaries that are subject to UK corporation tax are taxed 
at a rate of 19.0% (2019: 19.0%).  

The value of tax losses carried forward reduced to nil and there is now a timing difference related to accelerated capital allowances 
resulting in a £197,000 liability (2019: £141,000 liability). This resulted in an expense of £56,000 (2019: £53,000) to the Consolidated 
Income Statement.  

16.  Earnings per share 

Profit for the year 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue (basic) 
Basic earnings per share (pence) 
Diluted earnings per share (pence) 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue (basic) 
Basic earnings per share (pence) 
Diluted earnings per share (pence) 

2020 

2019 

£1,968,000 

£2,673,000 

118,964,270 
1.65 
1.37 

131,096,235 
2.04 
1.66 

£1,676,000 

£2,596,000 

118,964,270 
1.41 
1.19 

131,096,235 
1.98 
1.62 

The basic earnings per share calculation is based upon the profit for the year after taxation and the weighted average of the number 
of shares in issue throughout the year.  

Page | 55  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

16.  Earnings per share (continued) 
As at: 

Reconciliation of weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue between 
basic and diluted 

2020 

2019 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares (basic) 
Number of shares issued if all convertible loan notes were exchanged for equity 
Dilutive element of share options if exercised 

118,964,270 
36,555,556 
- 

131,096,235 
41,666,667 
- 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares (diluted) 

155,519,826 

172,762,902 

Reconciliation of profit for the year between basic and diluted 

Profit for the year (basic) 
Interest expense saved if all convertible loan notes were exchanged for equity  

Profit for the year (diluted) 

£1,968,000 
£166,250 

£2,673,000 
£196,150 

£2,134,250 

£2,869,150 

The diluted earnings per share calculation assumes that all convertible loan notes and share options have been converted / exercised 
at the beginning of the year where they are dilutive.  

As at: 

2020 

2019 

Reconciliation of total comprehensive income for the year between basic and diluted 

Total comprehensive income for the year (basic) 
Interest expense saved if all convertible loan notes were exchanged for equity  

Total comprehensive income for the year (diluted) 

17.  Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash at bank and in hand 
Notice account balance (less than 95 days) 
Fixed deposit (less than 90 days) 

£1,676,000 
£166,250 

£2,596,000 
£196,150 

£1,842,250 

£2,792,150 

Group 

Company 

2020 
£000 

11,728 
21,025 
1,300 

34,053 

2019 
£000 

14,620 
- 
- 

14,620 

2020 
£000 

1,378 
- 
- 

1,378 

2019 
£000 

119 
- 
- 

119 

Cash at bank includes an amount of £120,000 (2019: £1,060,000) representing receipts which are in the course of transmission. 

18.  Debt securities 

Financial assets at FVOCI: 
UK Government Treasury Bills 
Floating Rate Notes 

Group 

Company 

2020 
£000 

24,431 
1,101 

25,532 

2019 
£000 

44,690 
2,102 

46,792 

2020 
£000 

- 
- 

- 

2019 
£000 

- 
- 

- 

UK Government Treasury Bills are stated at fair value and unrealised changes in the fair value are reflected in other comprehensive 
income. There were realised gains of £261,000 (2019: £179,000) and unrealised losses of £51,000 (2019: unrealised gain of £51,000) 
during the year. 

Page | 56  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

19.  Financial assets 

Financial assets at FVOCI: 
Gain on Contingent consideration (see note 6(ii)) 
Gain on equity instrument 

Group 

Company 

2019 
£000 

2020 
£000 

- 
(1) 

(1) 

- 
- 

- 

2020 
£000 

253 
6 

259 

2019 
£000 

- 
- 

- 

The equity instrument represents an investment in a UK quoted company, elected to be classified as a financial asset at fair value 
through profit or loss. The investment is stated at market value and is classified as a level 1 investment in the IFRS 13 fair value 
hierarchy. The cost of the shares was £471,000. The unrealised difference between cost and market value has been taken to the 
Consolidated Income Statement. The investment made a net gain of £6,000 (2019: £1,000) during the year. 

20.  Loans and advances to customers 

Group 

HP balances 
Finance lease balances 
Unsecured personal loans 
Vehicle stocking plans 
Wholesale funding arrangements 
Block discounting 
Secured commercial loans 
Secured personal loans 
Government backed loans 

Gross 
Amount 
£000 

72,930 
34,373 
27,762 
1,807 
18,080 
13,848 
9,602 
2,152 
19,710 
200,264 

2020 
Impairment 
Allowance 
£000 

(1,779) 
(3,241) 
(364) 
- 
(808) 
(418) 
(511) 
- 
- 
(7,121) 

Carrying 
Value 
£000 

71,151 
31,132 
27,398 
1,807 
17,272 
13,430 
9,091 
2,152 
19,710 
193,143 

Gross 
Amount 
£000 

65,846 
40,359 
21,110 
1,494 
23,840 
15,693 
11,652 
4,149 

2019 
Impairment 
Allowance 
£000 

(1,537) 
(2,125) 
(199) 
(36) 
(300) 
(200) 
(376) 
- 

Carrying 
Value 
£000 

64,309 
38,234 
20,911 
1,458 
23,540 
15,493 
11,276 
4,149 

184,143 

(4,773) 

179,370 

Collateral  is  held  in  the  form  of  underlying  assets  for  HP,  finance  leases,  vehicles  stocking  plans,  block  discounting,  secured 
commercial and personal loans and wholesale funding arrangements.  

Specific allowance for impairment 

Balance at 1 January 
Specific allowance for impairment made 
Release of allowances previously made 
Write-offs 
Balance at 31 December 

Collective allowance for impairment 

Balance at 1 January 
Collective allowance for impairment made 
Release of allowances previously made 

Balance at 31 December 

Total allowances for impairment 

2020 
£000 

4,632 
5,231 
(1,519) 
(1,520) 
6,824 

2020 
£000 

141 
421 
(265) 

297 

7,121 

2019 
£000 

3,126 
2,091 
(64) 
(521) 
4,632 

2019 
£000 

268 
138 
(265) 

141 

4,773 

Advances  on  preferential  terms  are  available  to  all  Directors,  management  and  staff.  As  at  31  December  2020  £629,345  (2019: 
£490,641) had been lent on this basis. In the Group’s ordinary course of business, advances may be made to Shareholders, but all 
such advances are made on normal commercial terms.  

Page | 57  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

20.  Loans and advances to customers (continued) 
At the end of the current financial year 6 loan exposures (2019: 5) exceeded 10.0% of the capital base of the Bank:  

Exposure 

Block discounting facility 
Wholesale funding agreement 

Outstanding 
Balance 
2020 
£000 

5,878 
16,315 

Outstanding 
Balance 
2019 
£000 

15,693 
23,840 

HP and finance lease receivables 
Loans and advances to customers include the following HP and finance lease receivables: 

Less than one year 
Between one and five years 

Gross investment in HP and finance lease receivables 

The investment in HP and finance lease receivables net of unearned income comprises: 

Facility 
limit 
£000 

8,250 
17,482 

2019 
£000 

51,865 
71,124 

122,989 

2019 
£000 

44,787 
61,418 

106,205 

2020 
£000 

52,028 
71,348 

123,376 

2020 
£000 

45,250 
62,053 

107,303 

Less than one year 
Between one and five years 

Net investment in HP and finance lease receivables 

21.  Trade and other receivables 

Prepayments 
VAT recoverable 
Other debtors 

Group 

Company 

2020 
£000 

482 
586 
1,102 
2,170 

2019 
£000 

385 
835 
1,258 
2,478 

2020 
£000 

53 
256 
- 
309 

2019 
£000 

44 
187 
- 
231 

The Bank, as the Group VAT registered entity, had for some time considered the VAT recovery rate being obtained by the business 
was neither fair nor reasonable, specifically regarding the attribution of part of the residual input tax relating to the HP business not 
being considered as a taxable supply. In 2019, the Bank had a VAT receivable of £835,000. During the year, the Bank recognised an 
additional receivable and income of £372,000. This matter was resolved during the year and the Bank received full settlement. 

After consultation with its professional advisors, the Bank made a notice of error correction (“NEC”) to the Isle of Man Government 
Customs & Exercise Division in respect of a repayment for overpaid VAT to the amount of £534,000 exclusive of statutory interest. 
The NEC relates to bad debt relief that was not claimed during the period from 1 April 1989 to 18 March 1997. The Bank has recognised 
a receivable and income of £534,000 during the year. 

Page | 58  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

22.  Property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets 

Group 

Cost 
As at 1 January 2020 

Acquisition of subsidiary 
Additions 
Disposals 
As at 31 December 2020 

Accumulated depreciation 
As at 1 January 2020 

Charge for year 
Disposals 

As at 31 December 2020 

Carrying value at 31 December 2020 

Carrying value at 31 December 2019 

Leasehold 
Improvements 
£000 

IT 
Equipment 
£000 

Furniture and 
Equipment 
£000 

Motor 
Vehicles1 
£000 

Right-of-
use assets 
£000 

674 

- 
24 
- 
698 

315 

69 
- 

384 

314 

359 

393 

- 
69 
- 
462 

272 

71 
- 

343 

119 

121 

686 

2,582 
1,064 
- 
4,332 

622 

179 
- 

801 

3,531 

64 

2,574 

- 
30 
(127) 
2,477 

391 

413 
- 

804 

1,673 

2,183 

737 

- 
- 
- 
737 

165 

164 
- 

329 

408 

572 

1Motor vehicles relate to operating leases with the Group as lessor. 

Company 

Cost 
As at 1 January 2020 
Additions 
Disposals 

As at 31 December 2020 

Accumulated depreciation 
As at 1 January 2020 
Charge for year 
Disposals 

As at 31 December 2020 

Carrying value at 31 December 2020 

Carrying value at 31 December 2019 

Leasehold 
Improvements 
£000 

IT 
Equipment 
£000 

Furniture and 
Equipment 
£000 

Right-of 
use-assets 
£000 

234 
- 
- 

234 

169 
38 
- 

207 

27 

65 

13 
5 
- 

18 

4 
1 
- 

5 

13 

9 

17 
- 
- 

17 

5 
2 
- 

7 

10 

12 

424 
- 
- 

424 

60 
60 
- 

120 

304 

364 

Total 
£000 

5,064 

2,582 
1,187 
(127) 
8,706 

1,765 

896 
- 

2,661 

6,045 

3,299 

Total 
£000 

688 
5 
- 

693 

238 
101 
- 

339 

354 

450 

Page | 59  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

23.  Intangible assets 

Group 

Cost 
As at 1 January 2020 
Acquisition of subsidiary (note 31) 
Additions 
Disposals 
As at 31 December 2020 

Accumulated amortisation 
As at 1 January 2020 
Charge for year / impairment  
Disposals 

As at 31 December 2020 

Carrying value at 31 December 2020 

Carrying value at 31 December 2019 

24.  Deposits from customers 

Retail customers: term deposits 
Corporate customers: term deposits 

25.  Creditors and accrued charges 

Commission creditors 
Other creditors and accruals 
Lease liability 
Taxation creditors 

26.  Loan notes 

Related parties 
J Mellon 
Burnbrae Limited 
Southern Rock Insurance Company Limited 

Unrelated parties 

Customer 
Contracts  
£000 

Intellectual  
Property Rights 
£000 

IT Software and 
Website 
Development 
£000 

539 
134 
76 
- 
749 

443 
80 
- 

523 

226 

96 

2,163 
2 
155 
- 
2,320 

1,584 
188 
- 

1,772 

548 

579 

Total 
£000 

4,622 
136 
231 
- 
4,989 

2,329 
374 
- 

2,703 

2,286 

2,293 

2020 
£000 

209,235 
9,050 

218,285 

2019 
£000 

203,241 
6,692 

209,933 

2020 
£000 

1,748 
822 
503 
133 

3,206 

2020 
£000 

1,750 
3,200 
2,097 

7,047 
15,175 
22,222 

Group 

Company 

2019 
£000 

1,044 
893 
707 
328 

2,972 

2020 
£000 

- 
83 
418 
- 

501 

Group 

Company 

2019 
£000 

1,750 
1,200 
460 

3,410 
12,561 
15,971 

2020 
£000 

1,750 
3,200 
2,097 

7,047 
15,175 
22,222 

2019 
£000 

- 
66 
509 
- 

575 

2019 
£000 

1,750 
1,200 
460 

3,410 
12,561 
15,971 

1,920 
- 
- 
- 
1,920 

302 
106 
- 

408 

1,512 

1,618 

Notes 

JM 
BL 
SR 

UP 

JM – Two loans, one of £1,250,000 maturing on 26 February 2025, paying interest of 5.4% per annum, and one of £500,000 maturing 
on 31 July 2022 paying interest of 5.0% per annum. Both loans are convertible at the rate of 7.5 pence and 9 pence respectively.  

Page | 60  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

26.  Loan notes (continued) 
BL – Three loans, one of £1,200,000 maturing on 31 July 2022, paying interest of 5.0% per annum, and one of £1,000,000 maturing 
25 February 2025, paying interest of 5.4% per annum, and one of £1,000,000 maturing 28 February 2025 paying interest of 6% per 
annum.  Jim Mellon is the beneficial owner of BL and Denham Eke is also a director.  The £1,200,000 loan is convertible at a rate of 
7.5 pence.   

SR – One loan consisting of £2,097,085 maturing on 14 April 2025, paying interest of 6.5% per annum.   

UP – Thirty-three loans consisting of an average £459,848 with an average interest payable of 5.8% (2019: 5.5%) per annum.  The 
earliest maturity date is 9 February 2021 and the latest maturity is 12 October 2025.  

With respect to the convertible loans, the interest rate applied was deemed by the Directors to be equivalent to the market rate at the 
time with no conversion option.  
27.  Pension liability 
The Conister Trust Pension and Life Assurance Scheme (“Scheme”) operated by the Bank is a funded defined benefit arrangement 
which  provides  retirement  benefits  based  on  final  pensionable  salary.  The  Scheme  is  closed  to  new  entrants  and  the  last  active 
member of the Scheme left pensionable service in 2011. 

The Scheme is approved in the Isle of Man by the Assessor of Income Tax under the Income Tax (Retirement Benefit Schemes) Act 
1978 and must comply with the relevant legislation. In addition, it is registered as an authorised scheme with the FSA in the Isle of 
Man  under the  Retirement Benefits Scheme Act  2000.  The Scheme is subject to regulation  by the FSA but there is no  minimum 
funding regime in the Isle of Man.  

The  Scheme  is  governed  by  two  corporate  trustees,  Conister  Bank  Limited  and  Boal  &  Co  (Pensions)  Limited.  The  trustees  are 
responsible for the Scheme’s investment policy and for the exercise of discretionary powers in respect of the Scheme’s benefits. 

The rules of the Scheme state:  “Each Employer shall pay such sums in each Scheme Year as are estimated to be required to provide 
the benefits of the Scheme in respect of the Members in its employ”. 

Exposure to risk 
The  Company  is exposed to the risk that additional contributions will be required  in order to fund  the  Scheme  as a result  of poor 
experience. Some of the key factors that could lead to shortfalls are: 

investment performance – the return achieved on the Scheme’s assets may be lower than expected; and 

 
  mortality – members could live longer than foreseen. This would mean that benefits are paid for longer than expected, increasing 

the value of the related liabilities. 

In order to assess the sensitivity of the Scheme’s pension liability to these risks, sensitivity analyses have been carried out. Each 
sensitivity analysis is based on changing one of the assumptions used in the calculations, with no change in the other assumptions. 
The same method has been applied as was used to calculate the original pension liability and the results are presented in comparison 
to  that  liability.  It  should  be  noted  that  in practice  it  is  unlikely  that  one  assumption  will  change  without  a  movement  in  the  other 
assumptions; there may also be some correlation between some of these assumptions. It should also be noted that the value placed 
on the liabilities does not change on a straight line basis when one of the assumptions is changed. For example, a 2.0% change in 
an assumption will not necessarily produce twice the effect on the liabilities of a 1.0% change. 

No  changes  have  been  made  to  the  method  or  to  the  assumptions  stress-tested  for  these  sensitivity  analyses  compared  to  the 
previous period. The investment strategy of the Scheme has been set with regard to the liability profile of the Scheme. However, there 
are no explicit asset-liability matching strategies in place.  

Restriction of assets 
No adjustments have been made to the statement of financial position items as a result of the requirements of IFRIC 14 – IAS 19: The 
Limit  on  a  Defined  Benefit  Asset,  Minimum  Funding  Requirements  and  their  Interaction,  issued  by  IASB’s  International  Financial 
Reporting Interpretations Committee. 

Scheme amendments 
There have not been any past service costs or settlements in the financial year ending 31 December 2020 (2019: none). 

Page | 61  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

27.  Pension liability (continued) 
Funding policy 
The  funding  method  employed  to  calculate  the  value  of  previously  accrued  benefits  is  the  Projected  Unit  Method.  Following  the 
cessation of accrual of benefits when the last active member left service in 2011, regular future service contributions to the Scheme 
are no longer required. However, additional contributions will still be required to cover any shortfalls that might arise following each 
funding valuation. 

The  most  recent  triennial  full  actuarial  valuation  was  carried  out  at  31  March  2020,  which  showed  that  the  market  value  of  the 
Scheme’s assets was £1,432,000 representing 65.2% of the benefits that had accrued to members, after allowing for expected future 
increases in earnings. As required by IAS 19: Employee Benefits, this valuation has been updated by the actuary as at 31 December 
2020. 

The amounts recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position are as follows: 

Total underfunding in funded plans recognised as a liability 

Fair value of plan assets 
Present value of funded obligations 

Movement in the liability for defined benefit obligations 

Opening defined benefit obligations at 1 January  
Benefits paid by the plan 
Interest on obligations 
Actuarial loss 

Liability for defined benefit obligations at 31 December 

Movement in plan assets 

Opening fair value of plan assets at 1 January 
Expected return on assets 
Contribution by employer 
Actuarial (loss) / gain 
Benefits paid 

Closing fair value of plan assets at 31 December 

Expense recognised in income statement 

Interest on obligation 
Expected return on plan assets 

Total included in personnel costs 

Actual return on plan assets 

Actuarial loss recognised in other comprehensive income  

Actuarial (loss) / gain on plan assets 
Actuarial loss on defined benefit obligations 

2020 
£000 

1,406 
(2,350) 

(944) 

2020 
£000 

2,159 
(76) 
45 
222 

2,350 

2020 
£000 

1,471 
30 
- 
(19) 
(76) 

1,406 

2020 
£000 

45 
(30) 

15 

11 

2020 
£000 

(19) 
(222) 

(241) 

2019 
£000 

1,471 
(2,159) 

(688) 

2019 
£000 

1,945 
(69) 
55 
228 

2,159 

2019 
£000 

1,361 
38 
41 
100 
(69) 

1,471 

2019 
£000 

55 
(38) 

17 

142 

2019 
£000 

100 
(228) 

(128) 

Page | 62  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

27.  Pension liability (continued) 

Plan assets consist of the following 

Equity securities 
Corporate bonds 
Government bonds 
Cash 
Other 

The actuarial assumptions used to calculate Scheme liabilities under IAS19 are as follows: 

Rate of increase in pension in payment:  
Service up to 5 April 1997 
Service from 6 April 1997 to 13 September 2005 
Service from 14 September 2005 
Rate of increase in deferred pensions 
Discount rate applied to scheme liabilities 
Inflation 

2020 
% 

47 
19 
29 
2 
3 
100 

2019 
% 

50 
18 
30 
2 
- 
100 

2020 
% 

2019 
% 

2018 
% 

- 
2.9 
2.1 
5.0 
1.8 
3.0 

- 
3.0 
2.1 
5.0 
2.9 
3.1 

- 
3.0 
2.1 
5.0 
2.6 
3.1 

The assumptions used by the actuary are best estimates chosen from a range of possible assumptions, which due to the timescale 
covered, may not necessarily be borne out in practice.  

28.  Called up share capital  
Ordinary shares of no par value available for issue 

At 31 December 2020 

At 31 December 2019 

Issued and fully paid: Ordinary shares of no par value 

At 31 December 2020 

At 31 December 2019 

       Number 

200,200,000 

200,200,000 

£000 

19,121 

20,732 

       Number 

114,130,077 

131,096,235 

On  9  April  2020,  the  Company  and  Southern  Rock  Insurance  Company  Limited  (“SR”)  entered  into  a  share  buyback  agreement 
(“SBA”), pursuant to which SR agreed to sell 16,966,158 Ordinary Shares for a consideration of £1,611,785. The consideration was 
left outstanding as a loan agreement (See note 26). The Ordinary Shares acquired were cancelled, and the Company’s issued share 
capital reduced to 114,130,077 Ordinary Shares effective 14 April 2020. 

Prior to the SBA, SR had a loan of £460,000, made to the Company, which was due to be repaid or converted into Ordinary Shares 
on or before 26 April 2020. Upon completion of the SBA, the Company and SR entered into an agreement varying the terms of the 
convertible loan such that they became subject to the terms of the SBA which contains no ability to convert the amounts outstanding 
into Ordinary Shares. The principal amount outstanding in respect of the convertible loan was increased by £25,300 to account for 
the reduction of the interest rate in transition to the SBA.  

There are three convertible loans totalling £2,950,000 (2019: four convertible loans totalling £3,410,000).   

On  23  June  2014,  1,750,000  share  options  were  issued  to  Executive  Directors  and  senior  management  within  the  Group  at  an 
exercise price of 14 pence. The options vest over three years with a charge based on the fair value of 8 pence per option at the date 
of  grant.  The  period  of  grant  is  for  10  years  less  1  day  ending  22  June  2024.  Of  the  1,750,000  share  options  issued,  707,534 
(2019:1,050,000) remain outstanding. 342,466 options expired during the year. 

Page | 63  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

28.  Called up share capital (continued) 
Performance and service conditions attached to share options that have not fully vested are as follows: The options granted on 23 
June 2014 require a minimum of three years’ continuous employment service in order to exercise upon the vesting date. 

The fair value of services received in return for share options granted is based on the fair value of share options granted, measured 
using a binomial probability model with the following inputs for each award: 

Fair value at date of grant 
Share price at date of grant 
Exercise price 
Expected volatility 
Option life 
Risk-free interest rate (based on government bonds) 
Forfeiture rate 

The charge for the year for share options granted was £nil (2019: £nil). 

Analysis of changes in financing during the year 

Analysis of changes in financing during the year 

Balance at 1 January 
Issue of loan notes 
Issue of lease liability 
Payment of lease liabilities 

23 June 
2014 

£0.08 
£0.14 
£0.14 
55.0% 
3 
0.5% 
33.3% 

25 June 
2010 

£0.03 
£0.11 
£0.11 
47.0% 
3 
2.2% 
0.0% 

2020 
£000 

37,410 
4,640 
- 
(204) 

41,846 

2019 
£000 

36,603 
100 
855 
(148) 

37,410 

The  2019  closing  balance  is  represented  by  £19,121,000  share  capital  (2019:  £20,732,000),  £22,222,000  of  loan  notes  (2019: 
£15,971,000) and £503,000 lease liability (2019: £707,000). 

29.  List of associates 
Set out below is a list of associates of the Group:  

The Business Lending Exchange (“BLX”) 
Beer Swaps Limited (“BSL”) (See note 31) 
Payitmonthly Ltd (“PIML”) 

Group 
2020 
£000 

190 
- 
126 
316 

Group 
2019 
£000 

167 
20 
95 
282 

In December 2017, 40.0% of the share capital of BLX was acquired for nil consideration. The Group’s share of the associate’s total 
comprehensive income during the year was £23,000 (2019: £110,000). 

In  August  2018,  30%  of  the  share  capital  of  PIML  was  acquired  for  £90,000  consideration.  The  Group’s  resulting  share  of  the 
associate’s total comprehensive income during the year was £31,000 (2019: £4,000). 

In April 2018, 20% of the share capital of BSL was acquired for nil consideration. During the year, the Group obtained control of the 
subsidiary. Prior to obtaining control, the share of the associate’s total comprehensive income during the year was £nil (2019: 10,000). 

30.  List of subsidiaries 
Set out below is a list of subsidiaries of the Group:  

Carrying value of investments 

Conister Bank Limited 
Edgewater Associates Limited 
TranSend Holdings Limited 
Bradburn Limited 

Nature of 
Business 

31 December 
2020 
% Holding 

Date of 
Incorporation 

Asset and Personal Finance 
Wealth Management 
Holding Company 
Holding Company 

100 
100 
100 
100 

05/12/1935 
24/12/1996 
05/11/2007 
15/05/2009 

All subsidiaries are incorporated in the Isle of Man. 

Total 
2020 
£000 

20,592 
2,005 
- 
- 
22,597 

Total 
2019 
£000 

15,817 
2,005 
- 
- 
17,822 

Page | 64  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

31.  Acquisition of subsidiary 
Beer Swaps Limited (“BSL”) 

On 28 February 2020, the Group (through the Bank) announced that it entered into an agreement to acquire 55% of the shares and 
voting interests in BSL. As a result, the Group’s equity interest in BSL increased from 20% to 75%, thereby obtaining control of BSL.  

BSL provides equipment finance and rental products to UK based craft and micro-breweries.   

This acquisition strengthens the Group’s strategy of developing a network of niche loan brokers within the UK.  

For the 10 months ended 31 December 2020, BSL contributed revenue of £620,285 and profit of £21,659 to the Group’s results. If 
the acquisition had occurred on 1 January 2020, management estimates that the impact on consolidated fee income would have been 
£790,891 and the impact on consolidated profit for the period would have been £21,982. 

A. BSL - Consideration transferred 

The following table summarises the acquisition date fair value of each major class of consideration transferred: 

Cash 
Settlement of pre-existing relationship 

£’000 

707 
2,250 

2,957 

B. BSL - Settlement of pre-existing relationship 

The  Bank and  BSL were parties to a wholesale loan agreement with  the  Bank  as lender and BSL as borrower.  This pre-existing 
relationship was effectively terminated when the Bank acquired BSL. 

C. BSL - Acquisition-related costs 

The Group incurred acquisition-related costs of £30,000 relating to external legal fees and due diligence costs. These costs have 
been included in ‘other costs’ in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. 

D. BSL - Identifiable assets acquired, and liabilities assumed 

The following table summarises the recognised amounts of assets acquired, and liabilities assumed at the date of acquisition: 

Property, plant and equipment 
Intangible assets – website 
Intangible assets – customer related 
Intangible assets – contract related 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade and other receivables 
Creditors and accrued charges 

Total identifiable net assets acquired 

£’000 

2,582 
2 
71 
63 
59 
109 
(299) 

2,587 

Page | 65  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

31.  Acquisition of subsidiary (continued) 
E. BSL – Measurement of fair values 

The valuation techniques use for measuring the fair value of material assets acquired were as follows: 

Assets acquired 

Valuation technique 

Property, plant and equipment 

Intangible assets 

Market comparison technique and cost technique: The valuation 
model considers market prices for similar items when they are 
available,  and 
the  depreciated  replacement  cost  when 
appropriate. Depreciated replacement cost reflects adjustments 
for  physical  deterioration  as  well  as  functional  and  economic 
obsolescence. 

Multi-period excess earnings method: The multi-period excess 
earnings method considers the present value of net cash flows 
expected to be generated by the customer relationships. 

The trade and other receivables comprise gross contractual amounts due of £116,000, of which £nil was expected to be uncollectable 
at the date of acquisition. 

F. BSL - Goodwill 

The goodwill arising from the acquisition has been recognised as follows: 

Total consideration transferred 
Non-controlling interest, based on their proportionate interest in the recognised amounts 
of the assets and liabilities of BSL 
Fair value of existing interest in BSL 
Fair value of identifiable net assets 

Goodwill 

£’000 

2,957 

51 
257 
(2,587) 

678 

The remeasurement to fair value of the Bank’s existing 20% interest in BSL resulted in a gain of £237,000 (£257,000 less the £20,000 
carrying  amount  of  the  equity  accounted  investee  at  the  date  of  acquisition).  This  amount  has  been  included  separately  in  the 
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. 

Blue Star Business Solutions Limited (“BBSL”) 

On 16 April 2019, the Group (through BBL) acquired 100% of the shares and voting interest in BBSL, obtaining control of BBSL. The 
Group agreed to pay the selling shareholders: 

  50% of net profits in BBSL for 3 years post completion; and 
  50% of the incremental net profit that the Group benefits from as a result of taking up BBSL loan proposals post completion 

up until the third anniversary. 

This is to be paid on each anniversary with a final payment in year 4 for the unrealised lending profit. The total consideration is to 
have a cap of £4,000,000 in total. The contingent consideration is calculated by forecasting 3 years of net profits discounted using an 
interest rate of 16.0% per annum. The range of contingent consideration payable is £nil - £2,500,000. 

See note 6 for the fair value of the Contingent Consideration at 31 December 2020. 

Page | 66  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

32.  Goodwill 

Cash generating unit 

EAL 
BBSL 
BSL 
ECF Asset Finance Limited (“ECF”) 
Three Spires Insurance Services Limited (“Three Spires”) 

Group 
2020 
£000 

1,849 
1,390 
678 
454 
41 
4,412 

Group 
2019 
£000 

1,849 
1,390 
- 
454 
41 
3,734 

The  goodwill  is  considered  to  have an  indefinite  life  and  is reviewed on  an  annual  basis by  comparing  its  estimated  recoverable 
amount with its carrying value.  

The estimated recoverable amount in relation to the goodwill generated on the purchase of EAL is based on the forecasted 3 year 
cash flow projections, extrapolated to 10 years using a 2.0% annual increment, and then discounted using a 11.0% discount factor. 
The sensitivity of the analysis was tested using additional discount factors of 15.0% and 20.0% on stable profit levels. 

The  estimated  recoverable amount  in  relation  to  the  goodwill  generated  on the  purchase  of  BBSL  is  based  on forecasted  3 year 
interest income calculated at an average yield of 8%, with a terminal value calculated using a 3.0% growth rate of net income and 
then discounted using a 14.0% discount factor. The sensitivity of the analysis was tested using additional discount factors of up to 
20.0% on varying interest income growth rates. 

The estimated recoverable amount in relation to the goodwill generated on the purchase of BSL is based on a 4 year sales forecast, 
extrapolated to 14  years using a 1.5%  annual increment, and  then discounted using  a  12% discount factor. The sensitivity of  the 
analysis was tested using additional discount factors of 11.0% and 20.0% on varying sales volumes. On the basis of the above reviews 
no impairment to goodwill has been made in the current year. 

The estimated recoverable amount in relation to the goodwill generated on the purchase of ECF is based on forecasted 3 year sales 
interest income calculated at 5.0% margin, extrapolated to 10 years using a 2.0% annual increment, and then discounted using a 
11.0% discount factor. The sensitivity of the analysis was tested using additional discount factors of 15.0% and 20.0% on varying 
sales volumes.  

The goodwill generated on the purchase of Three Spires has been reviewed at the current year end and is considered adequate given 
its income streams referred to EAL.  Based on the above reviews no impairment to goodwill has been made in the current year. 

33.  Investment in Group undertakings 
Amounts owed to Group undertakings 
Amounts owed to Group undertakings are unsecured, interest-free and repayable on demand. 

Subordinated loans 
MFG has issued several subordinated loans as part of its equity funding into the Bank and EAL. 

Creation 

Maturity 

Interest rate
% p.a.

Conister Bank Limited 
11 February 2014 
27 May 2014 
9 July 2014 
17 September 2014 
22 July 2013 
25 October 2013 
23 September 2016 
14 June 2017 
12 June 2018 

11 February 2024 
27 May 2024 
9 July 2024 
17 September 2026 
22 July 2033 
22 October 2033 
23 September 2036 
14 June 2037 
12 June 2038 

Edgewater Associates Limited 
28 February 2013 
21 February 2017 
14 May 2017 

28 February 2018* 
21 February 2027 
14 May 2027 

7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0

7.0
7.0
7.0

2020 
£000 

500 
500 
500 
400 
1,000 
1,000 
1,100 
450 
2,000 

- 
150 
128 
7,728 

* The subordinated loan due for repayment on 28 February 2019 continued beyond maturity and was settled in 2020. 

2019 
£000 

500 
500 
500 
400 
1,000 
1,000 
1,100 
450 
2,000 

50 
150 
128 
7,778 

Page | 67  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

34.  Related party transactions 
Cash deposits 
During the year, the Bank held cash on deposit on behalf of Jim Mellon (Executive Chairman of MFG) and companies related to Jim 
Mellon and Denham Eke (CEO of MFG).  Total deposits amounted to £432,213 (2019: £446,366), at normal commercial interest rates 
in accordance with the standard rates offered by the Bank.  

During the year, the Bank held cash on deposit on behalf of David Gibson (Non-executive Director of the Bank and MFG) of £50,282 (2019: 
£nil). 

Staff and commercial loans 
Details of staff loans are given in note 20. 

Commercial loans have been made to various companies connected to Jim Mellon and Denham Eke on normal commercial terms. 
As at 31 December 2020, £23,742 of capital and interest was outstanding (2019: £62,746). 

Intercompany recharges 
Various  intercompany  recharges  are  made  during  the  course  of  the  year  as  a  result  of  the  Bank  settling  debts  in  other  Group 
companies. EAL provides services to the Group in arranging its insurance and defined contribution pension arrangements. 

Loan advance to EAL 
On 14 December 2016, a loan advance was made to EAL by the Bank in order to provide the finance required to acquire MBL.  The 
advance was for £700,000 at an interest rate of 8% per annum repayable over 6 years.  A negative pledge was given by EAL to not 
encumber any property or assets or enter into an arrangement to borrow any further monies. The balance as at 31 December 2020 
was £273,568 (2019: £395,172). 

Loan advance to BLX 
On 11 October 2017, a £4,000,000 loan facility was made available to BLX by the Bank in order to provide the finance required to 
expand its operations. The facility is for 12 months, followed by a 3 year amortisation period. Interest is charged at commercial rates. 
Due to subsequent facility increases, the loan facility available for draw down is £5,300,000 as at year-end, with £4,587,000 (2019: 
£4,000,000) having been advanced to BLX. 

Loan advance to PIML 
On 24 May 2018, a £500,000 loan facility was made available to PIML by the Bank in order to provide the finance required to expand 
its operations. The facility is for 12 months. Interest is charged at commercial rates. During the year, the facility was increased to 
£1,500,000. At 31 December 2020, £685,000 (2019: £1,424,000) had been advanced to PIML.  

Investments 
The Bank holds less than 1% equity in the share capital of an investment of which Jim Mellon is a Shareholder (note 19).  Denham 
Eke acts as co-chairman. 

Page | 68  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

34.  Related party transactions (continued) 
Subordinated loans 
The Company has advanced £7,450,000 (2019: £7,450,000) of subordinated loans to the Bank and £278,000 (2019: £328,000) to 
EAL at 31 December 2020. See note 33 for more details. 

Loan notes 
See note 26 for a list of related party loan notes as at 31 December 2020 and 2019. 

Key management remuneration including Executive Directors 

Short-term employee benefits 

2020 
£000 

1,120 

2019 
£000 

927 

35.  Leases 
A. Leases as lessee 
The Group leases the head office building in the Isle of Man. The leases typically run for a period of 10 years with an option to renew 
the lease after that date. Lease payments are renegotiated every 10 years to reflect market rentals. 

The Group leases and office unit in the United Kingdom and IT equipment with contract terms of 2 to 3 years. These leases are short-
term and/or leases of low-value items. The Group has elected not to recognise right-of-use assets and lease liabilities for these leases. 

Information about leases for which the Group is a lessee is presented below. 

i. Right-of-use assets 

Right-of-use assets related to leased properties that do not meet the definition of investment property are presented as property, plant 
and equipment. 

Group 

Cost 
As at 1 January 2020 

Additions 
Disposals 
As at 31 December 2020 

Accumulated depreciation 
As at 1 January 2020 

Charge for the year 
Eliminated on disposals 
As at 31 December 2020 

Carrying value at 31 December 2020 

Carrying value at 31 December 2019 

ii. Amounts recognised in profit or loss 

Interest on lease liabilities 
Depreciation expense 
Expenses relating to short-term leases and low-value assets 

Land and 
buildings 
£000 

Total 
£000 

737 
- 
- 
737 

165 
164 
- 
329 

408 

572 

2020 
£000 

40 
164 
97 

737 
- 
- 
737 

165 
164 
- 
329 

408 

572 

2019 
£000 

47 
165 
117 

Page | 69  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

35.  Leases (continued) 
iii. Amounts recognised in statement of cash flows 

Total cash outflow for leases 

iv. Non-cancellable operating lease rentals are payable in respect of property as follows: 

Less than one year 
Between one and five years 
Over five years 
Total operating lease rentals payable 

36.  Subsequent events 
There were no subsequent events occurring after 31 December 2020.  

2020 
£000 

244 

2020 
£000 

84 
- 
- 
84 

2019 
£000 

195 

2019 
£000 

100 
- 
- 
100 

Page | 70  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

37.  Financial risk management 
A. Introduction and overview 
The Group has exposure to the following risks from financial instruments: 

  credit risk; 
 
liquidity risk; 
  market risk; and 
  operational risk. 

i. Risk management framework 
The Board has overall responsibility for the establishment and oversight of the Group’s risk management framework. The Board has 
established the ARCC, which is responsible for approving and monitoring Group risk management policies. The ARCC is assisted in 
its  oversight  role  by  Internal  Audit.  Internal  Audit  undertakes  both  regular  and  ad  hoc  reviews  of  risk  management  controls  and 
procedures, the results of which are reported to the ARCC. 

The Group’s risk management policies are established to identify and analyse the risks faced by the Group, to set appropriate risk 
limits and controls, and to monitor risks and adherence to limits. The risk management policies and systems are reviewed regularly 
to reflect changes in market conditions and the Group’s activities. The Group, though its training and management standards and 
procedures, aims to develop a disciplined and constructive control environment in which all employees understand their roles and 
obligations. 

B. Credit risk 
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer or counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its contractual 
obligations,  and  arises  principally  from the  Group’s  loans  and  advances  to  customers  and  investment  debt  securities. Credit  risk 
includes counterparty, concentration, underwriting and credit mitigation risks.  

Management of credit risk 
The Bank’s Board of Directors created the Credit Committee which is responsible for managing credit risk, including the following: 

  Formulating  credit  policies in consultation with  business units,  covering collateral requirements, credit  assessments, risk 
grading and reporting, documentary and legal procedures, and compliance with regulatory and statutory requirements; 
  Establishing the authorisation structure for the approval and renewal of credit facilities. Authorisation limits are allocated to 

in line with credit policy; 

  Reviewing and assessing credit risk: The Credit Committee assesses all credit exposures in excess of designated limits, 
before facilities are committed to customers. Renewals and reviews of facilities are subject to the same review process. 
  Limiting concentrations of  exposures to  counterparties, geographies and  industries,  by issuer, credit  rating band, market 

liquidity and country (for debt securities); 

  Developing and maintaining risk gradings to categorise exposures according to the degree of risk of default. The current risk 

grading consists of 3 grades reflecting varying degrees of risk of default; 

  Developing and maintaining the Group’s process for measuring ECL: This includes processes for: 

o 
o 
o 

initial approval, regular validation and back-testing of the models used;  
determining and monitoring significant increase in credit risk; and  
incorporation of forward-looking information; and 

  Reviewing compliance with agreed exposure limits. Regular reports on the credit quality of portfolios are provided to the 

Credit Committee which may require corrective action to be taken.  

C. Liquidity risk 
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will encounter difficulty in meeting obligations associated with its financial liabilities that are 
settled by delivering cash or another financial asset. Liquidity risk arises from mismatches in the timing and amounts of cash flows, 
which is inherent to the Group’s operations and investments. 

Management of liquidity risk 
The  Group’s  approach  to  managing  liquidity  is  to  ensure,  as  far  as  possible,  that  it  will  always  have  enough  liquidity  to  meet  its 
liabilities when they are due, under both normal and stressed conditions, without incurring unacceptable losses or risking damage to 
the Group’s reputation. The key elements of the Group’s liquidity strategy are as follows: 

  Funding base: offering six-months to five-year fixed term deposit structure with no early redemption option. This means the 
Bank is not subject to optionality risk where customers redeem fixed rate products where there may be a better rate available 
within the market;  

  Funding profile: the Bank has a matched funding profile and does not engage in maturity transformation which means that 

on a cumulative mismatch position the Bank is forecast to be able to meet all liabilities as they fall due; 

Page | 71  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

37.  Financial risk management (continued) 
C. Liquidity risk (continued) 
Management of liquidity risk (continued) 

  Monitoring maturity mismatches, behavioural characteristics of the Group’s financial assets and financial liabilities, and the 
extent to which the Group’s assets are encumbered and so not available as potential collateral for obtaining funding;  
  Liquidity buffer: the Bank maintains a liquidity buffer of 10.0% of its deposit liabilities, with strict short-term mismatch limits 
of 0.0% for sight to three months and -5.0% for sight to six months. This ensures that the Bank is able to withstand any short-
term liquidity shock; and 
Interbank market: the Bank has no exposure to the interbank lending market. The Bank has no reliance on liquidity via the 
wholesale markets. In turn, if market conditions meant access to the wholesale funding was constrained as per the 2008 
credit crisis, this would have no foreseeable effect on the Bank.  

 

The Bank’s liquidity position is monitored daily against internal and external limits agreed with the FSA and according to the Bank’s 
Liquidity Policy. The Bank also has a Liquidity Contingency Policy and Liquidity Contingency Committee in the event of a liquidity 
crisis or potential liquidity disruption event occurring. 

The Treasury department receives information from other business units regarding the liquidity profile of their financial assets and 
financial liabilities and details of other projected cash flows arising from projected future business. Treasury then maintains a portfolio 
of short-term liquid assets, largely made up of short-term liquid investment securities, loans and advances to banks and other inter-
bank facilities, to ensure that sufficient liquidity is maintained within the Group as a whole. 

Regular liquidity stress testing is conducted under a variety of scenarios covering both normal and more severe market conditions. 
The scenarios are developed considering both Group-specific events and market-related events (e.g. prolonged market illiquidity). 

D. Market risk 
Market risk is the risk that changes in market prices; e.g. interest rates, equity prices, foreign exchange rates and credit spreads (not 
relating  to  changes  in  the  obligor’s/issuer’s  credit  standing),  will  affect  the  Group’s  income  or  value  of  its  holdings  of  financial 
instruments. The objective of the Group’s market risk management is to manage and control market risk exposures within acceptable 
parameters to ensure the Group’s solvency while optimising the return on risk. 

Management of market risks 
Overall authority for market risk is vested in the Assets and Liabilities Committee (“ALCO”) which sets up limits for each type of risk. 
Group finance is responsible for the development of risk management policies (subject to review and approval by the ALCO) and for 
the day-to-day review of their implementation. 

Foreign exchange risk 
The Bank is not subject to foreign exchange risks and its business is conducted in pounds sterling. 

Equity risk 
The Group has investment in associates of £308,000 (2019: £282,000) which are carried at cost adjusted for the Group’s share of net 
asset value. The investment is audited annually and the Bank has access to these accounts. The Bank’s exposure to market risk is 
not considered significant given the low carrying amount of the investment. 

The Group’s investment in listed equities is not considered significant.  

Interest rate risk 
The principal potential interest rate risk that the Bank is exposed to is the risk that the fixed interest rate and term profile of its deposit 
base differs materially from the fixed interest rate and term profile of its asset base, or basis and term structure risk.  

Additional interest rate risk may arise for banks where (a) customers are able to react to market sensitivity and redeem fixed rate 
products and (b) where a bank has taken out interest rate derivate hedges especially against longer-term interest rate risk, where the 
hedge moves against the bank.  

Interest rate risk for the Bank is not deemed to be currently material due to the Bank’s matched funding profile. Any interest rate risk 
assumed by the Bank will arise from a reduction in interest rates, in a rising environment due to the nature of the Bank’s products and 
its matched funded profile. The Bank should be able to increase its lending rate to match any corresponding rise in its cost of funds, 
notwithstanding  its  inability  to  vary  rates on its  existing  loan book.  The Bank attempts to  efficiently  match  its  deposit  taking to  its 
funding requirements. 

Page | 72  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

37.  Financial risk management (continued) 
E. Operational risk 
Operational  risk  is  the  risk of direct  or  indirect  loss arising from  a  wide  variety  of  causes associated  with  the  Group’s processes, 
personnel, technology and infrastructure, and from external factors other than credit, market and liquidity risks – e.g. those arising 
from legal and regulatory requirements and generally accepted standards of corporate behaviour. Operational risks arise from all of 
the Group’s operations. 

Management of operational risk 
The Group’s objective is to manage operational risk so as to balance the avoidance of financial losses and damage to the Group’s 
reputation with overall cost effectiveness and innovation. In all cases, Group policy requires compliance with all applicable legal and 
regulatory requirements. 

The Group has developed standards for the management of operational risk in the following areas: 

  Business continuity planning; 
  Requirements for appropriate segregation of duties, including the independent authorisation of transactions; 
  Requirements for the reconciliation and monitoring of transactions; 
  Compliance with regulatory and other legal requirements; 
  Documentation of controls and procedures; 
  Periodic assessment of operational risks faced, and the adequacy of controls and procedures to address the risks identified; 
  Requirements for the reporting of operational losses and proposed remedial action; 
  Development of contingency plans; 
  Training and professional development; 
  Ethical and business standards; 
 
  Risk mitigation, including insurance where this is cost-effective. 

Information technology and cyber risks; and  

Compliance  with  Group  standards  is  supported  by  a  programme  of  periodic  reviews  undertaken  by  Internal  Audit.  The results  of 
Internal Audit reviews are reported to the ARCC. 

38.  Basis of measurement 
The financial statements are prepared on a historical cost basis, except for the following material items: 

Items 

Measurement basis 

FVTPL – Trading asset 
FVOCI – Debt securities 
Net defined benefit liability 

Fair value 
Fair value 
Fair  value  of  plan  assets  less  the  present  value  of  the 
defined benefit obligation 

Page | 73  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

39.  Significant accounting policies 
A  number  of  new  standards  are  effective  from  1  January  2020  but  they  do  not  have  a  material  effect  on  the  Group’s  financial 
statements. 

The Group has consistently applied the following accounting policies to all periods presented in these financial statements.  

Set out below is an index of the significant accounting policies, the details of which are available on the pages that follow: 

Ref. 

Note description 

A. 
B.  
C. 
D.  
E. 
F. 
G. 
H. 
I. 
J. 
K. 
L. 
M. 
N. 
O. 
P. 
Q. 

Basis of consolidation of subsidiaries and separate financial statements of the Company 
Interest in equity accounted investees 
Interest 
Fee and commission income 
Leases 
Income tax 
Financial assets and financial liabilities 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Loans and advances 
Property, plant and equipment 
Intangibles assets and goodwill 
Impairment of non-financial assets 
Deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities 
Employee benefits 
Share capital and reserves 
Earnings per share (“EPS”) 
Segmental reporting 

No. 

75 
75 
75 
76 
76 
77 
78 
82 
82 
82 
82 
83 
84 
84 
84 
84 
85 

Page | 74  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

39.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

A. Basis of consolidation of subsidiaries and separate financial statements of the Company 
i. Business combinations 
The  Group  accounts  for  business  combinations  using  the  acquisition  method  when  control  is  transferred  to  the  Group.  The 
consideration transferred in the acquisition is generally measured at fair value, as are the identifiable net assets acquired. Any goodwill 
that arises is tested annually for impairment. Any gain on a bargain purchase is recognised in profit or loss immediately. Transaction 
costs are expensed as incurred, except if they are related to issue of debt or equity securities. 

ii. Subsidiaries 
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. The Group controls an entity if it is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from 
its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its control over the entity. The Group reassesses 
whether it has control if there are changes to one or more of the elements of control. This includes circumstances in which protective 
rights held (e.g. those resulting from a lending relationship) become substantive and lead to the Group having power over an investee. 
The  financial  statements  of  subsidiaries  are  included  in  the  consolidated  financial  statements  from  the  date  on  which  control 
commences until the date on which control ceases. 

iii. Non-controlling interests 
NCI are measured initially at their proportionate share of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets at the date of acquisition. 

Changes in the Group’s interest in a subsidiary that do not result in a loss of control are accounted for as equity transactions. 

iv. Loss of control 
When the Group loses control over a subsidiary, it derecognises the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary, and any related Non-
Controlling  Interest (“NCI”)  and  other components of equity.  Any resulting  gain or loss is recognised  in  profit or loss. Any interest 
retained in the former subsidiary is measured at fair value when control is lost.  

v. Transactions eliminated on consolidation 
Intra-group balances and transactions, and any unrealised income and expenses arising from intra-group transactions, are eliminated 
in preparing the consolidated financial statements. Unrealised losses are eliminated in the same way as unrealised gains, but only to 
the extent that there is no evidence of impairment. 

vi. Separate financial statements of the Company 
In the separate financial statements of the Company, interests in subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures are accounted for at cost. 

B. Interests in equity accounted investees 
The Group’s interests in equity accounted investees may comprise interests in associates and joint ventures. 

Associates  are  those  entities  in  which  the  Group  has  significant  influence,  but  not  control  or  joint  control,  over  the  financial  and 
operating policies. A joint venture is an arrangement in which the Group has joint control, whereby the Group has rights to the net 
assets of the arrangement, rather than rights to its assets and obligations for its liabilities.  

Interests  in  associates and  joint  ventures  are  accounted  for  using the  equity method. They  are  initially  recognised  at cost,  which 
includes transaction costs. Subsequent to initial recognition, the consolidated financial statements include the Group’s share of the 
profit or loss and OCI of equity accounted investees, until the date on which significant influence or joint control ceases. 

C. Interest  
Interest income and expense are recognised in profit or loss using the effective interest rate method.  

i. Effective interest rate 
The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts of the financial instrument to 
the gross carrying amount of the financial asset or amortised cost of the financial liability. When calculating the effective interest rate 
for financial assets, the Group estimates future cash flows considering all contractual terms of the financial instruments, including 
origination fees, loan incentives, broker fees payable, estimated early repayment charges, balloon payments and all other premiums 
and discounts. It also includes direct incremental transaction costs related to the acquisition or issue of the financial instrument. The 
calculation does not consider future credit losses. 

ii. Amortised cost and gross carrying amount 
The amortised cost of a financial asset or financial liability is the amount at which the financial asset or financial liability is measured 
on initial recognition minus the principal repayments, plus or minus the cumulative amortisation using the effective interest method of 
any difference between that initial amount and the maturity amount and, for financial assets, adjusted for any expected credit loss 
allowance.  

Page | 75  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

39.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

C. Interest (continued) 
ii. Amortised cost and gross carrying amount (continued) 
The gross carrying amount of a financial asset is the amortised cost of a financial asset before adjusting for any expected credit loss 
allowance. 

iii. Calculation of interest income and expense 
In calculating interest income and expense, the effective interest rate is applied to the gross carrying amount of the asset (when the 
asset is not credit-impaired) or to the amortised cost of the liability. 

However, for financial  assets that have become credit-impaired subsequent to  initial recognition,  interest income  is calculated by 
applying  the  effective  interest  rate  to  the  amortised  cost  of  the  financial  asset.  If  the  asset  is  no  longer  credit-impaired,  then  the 
calculation of interest income reverts to the gross basis. 

D. Fee and commission income 
The Group generates fee and commission income through provision of independent financial advice, insurance brokerage agency, 
introducer of foreign exchange services and commissions from brokering business finance for small and medium sized enterprises.  

Independent financial advice and insurance brokerage agency 
Income represents commission arising on services and premiums relating to policies and other investment products committed during 
the year, as well as renewal commissions having arisen on services and premiums relating to policies and other investment products 
committed during the year and previous years and effective at the balance sheet date. Income is recognised on the date that policies 
are submitted to product providers with an appropriate discount being applied for policies not completed. As a way to estimate what 
is  due  at  the year-end,  a  “not  proceeded  with”  rate  of  10.0%  for  pipeline  life  insurance  products  and 0.0%  for non-life insurance 
pipeline is assumed. Renewal commissions are estimated by taking the historical amount written pro-rata to 3 months.  

Other 
Income other than that directly related to the loans is recognised over the period for which service has been provided or on completion 
of an act to which the fee relates.  

E. Leases 
At inception of a contract, the Group assesses whether a contract is, or contains, a lease. A contract is, or contains, a lease if the 
contract coveys the right to control the use of an identified asset for a period of time in exchange for consideration. 

i. As a lessee 
At commencement or on modification of a contract that contains a lease component, the Group allocates the consideration in the 
contract to each lease component on the basis of its relative stand-alone prices. However, for the leases of property the Group has 
elected not to separate non-lease components and as a result, accounts for the lease and non-lease components as a single lease 
component. 

The Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease liability at the lease commencement date. The right-of-use asset is initially 
measured at cost, which comprises the initial amount of the lease liability adjusted for any lease payments made at or before the 
commencement date, plus any initial direct costs incurred and an estimate of costs to dismantle and remove the underlying asset or 
to restore the underlying asset or the site on which it is located, less any lease incentives received. 

The right-of-use asset is subsequently depreciated using the straight-line method from the commencement date to the end of the 
lease term, unless the lease transfers ownership of the underlying asset to the Group by the end of the lease term or the cost of the 
right-of-use asset reflects that the Group will exercise a purchase option. In that case the right-of-use asset will be depreciated over 
the useful life of the underlying asset, which is determined on the same basis as those of property and equipment. In addition, the 
right-of-use asset is periodically reduced by impairment losses, if any, and adjusted for certain remeasurements of the lease liability. 

The  lease  liability  is  initially  measured  at  the  present  value of  the  lease  payments  that  are  not  paid at  the  commencement  date, 
discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease or, if that rate cannot be readily determined, the Group’s incremental borrowing 
rate. Generally, the Group uses its incremental borrowing rate as the discount rate. 

The Group determines its incremental borrowing rate by obtaining interest rates from various external financing sources and makes 
certain adjustments to reflect the terms of the lease and the type of the asset leased. 

Page | 76  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

39.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

E. Leases (continued) 
i. As a lessee (continued) 
Lease payments included in the measurement of the lease liability comprise the following: 

  Fixed payments, including in-substance fixed payments; 
  Variable  lease  payments  that  depend  on  an  index  or  a  rate,  initially  measured  using  the  index  or  rate  as  at  the 

commencement date; 

  Amounts expected to be payable under a residual value guarantee; and 
  The exercise price under a purchase option that the Group is reasonably certain to exercise, lease payments in an optional 
renewal period if the Group is reasonably certain to exercise an extension option, and penalties for early termination of a 
lease unless the Group is reasonably certain not to terminate early. 

The lease liability is measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. It is remeasured when there is a change in future 
lease payments arising from a change in an index or rate, if there is a change in the Group’s estimate of the amount expected to be 
payable under a residual value guarantee, if the Group changes its assessment of whether it will exercise a purchase, extension or 
termination option or if there is a revised in-substance fixed lease payment. 

When the lease liability is remeasured in this way, a corresponding adjustment is made to the carrying amount of the right-of-use 
asset, or is recorded in profit or loss if the carrying amount of the right-of-use asset has been reduced to zero. 

The Group presents right-of-use assets that do not meet the definition of investment property in ‘property, plant and equipment’ and 
lease liabilities in ‘loans and borrowings’ in the statement of financial position. 

Short-term leases and leases of low-value assets 
The Group has elected not to recognise right-of-use assets and lease liabilities for leases of low-value assets and short-term leases, 
including IT equipment. The Group recognises the lease payments associated with these leases as an expense on a straight-line 
basis over the lease term.  

ii. As a lessor 
At inception or on modification of a contract that contains a lease component, the Group allocates the consideration in the contract to 
each lease component on the basis of their relative stand-alone prices. 

When the Group acts as a lessor, it determines at lease inception whether each lease is a finance or an operating lease. 

To  classify  each  lease,  the  Group  makes  an  overall  assessment  of  whether  the  lease  transfers  substantially  all  of  the  risks  and 
rewards  incidental  to  ownership  of  the  underlying  asset.  If  this  is  the case,  then  the  lease  is  a  finance  lease;  if  not,  then  it  is  an 
operating lease. As part of this assessment, the Group considers certain indicators such as whether the lease is for the major part of 
the economic life of the asset. 

Finance leases and HP contracts  
When assets are subject to a finance lease or HP contract, the present value of the lease payments is recognised as a receivable. 
The difference between the gross receivable and the present value of the receivable is recognised as unearned finance income. HP 
and lease income is recognised over the term of the contract or lease reflecting a constant periodic rate of return on the net investment 
in the contract or lease. Initial direct costs, which  may include  commissions and legal  fees directly attributable  to negotiating  and 
arranging the contract or lease, are included in the measurement of the net investment of the contract or lease at inception.  

Operating leases  
Leases in which  a significant portion of the risks and rewards of ownership  are  retained  by the lessor are classified as operating 
leases. Payments made under operating leases (net of any incentives received from the lessor) are charged to profit or loss and other 
comprehensive income on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease. 

F. Income tax 
Current and deferred taxation 
Current taxation relates to the estimated corporation tax payable in the current financial year.  Deferred taxation is provided in full, 
using the liability method, on timing differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in 
the consolidated financial statements. Deferred tax is not recognised for taxable temporary differences arising on the initial recognition 
of goodwill and temporary differences related to investments in subsidiaries and associates to the extent that the Group is able to 
control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and it is probable that they will not reverse in the foreseeable future. 

Deferred taxation is determined using tax rates, and laws that have been enacted or substantially enacted by the reporting date and 
are expected to apply when the related deferred tax is realised. Deferred taxation assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable 
that future taxable profit will be available against which the temporary differences can be utilised.  

Page | 77  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

39.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities 
i. Recognition and initial measurement 
The Group initially recognises loans and advances, deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities on the date on which 
they are originated. All other financial instruments including regular-way purchases and sales of financial assets are recognised on 
the trade date, which is the date on which the Group becomes party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. 

A financial asset or financial liability is measured initially at fair value plus, for an item not at FVTPL, transaction costs that are directly 
attributable to its acquisition or issue. 

ii. Classification 
Financial assets 
On initial recognition, a financial asset is classified as measured at amortised cost, FVOCI or FVTPL. 

A financial asset is measured at amortised cost if it meets both of the following conditions and is not designated as at FVTPL: 
  The asset is held within a business model whose objective is to hold assets to collect contractual cash flows; and 
  The contractual terms of the financial asset give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are solely payments of principal 

and interest (“SPPI”). 

A debt instrument is measured at FVOCI only if it meets both of the following conditions and is not designated as FVTPL: 

  The asset is held within a business model whose objective is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling 

financial assets; and 

  The contractual terms of the financial asset give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are SPPI. 

On  initial  recognition  of  an  equity  investment  that  is  not  held  for  trading,  the  Group  may  irrevocably  elect  to  present  subsequent 
changes in fair value in OCI. This election is made on an investment-by-investment basis. 

All other financial assets are classified as measured at FVTPL. 

In addition, on initial recognition, the Group may irrevocably designate a financial asset that otherwise meets the requirements to be 
measured at amortised cost or at FVOCI as at FVTPL if doing so eliminates or significantly reduces an accounting mismatch that 
would otherwise arise. 

Business model assessment 
The Group makes an assessment of the objective of a business model in which an asset is held at a portfolio level because this best 
reflects the way the business is managed and information provided to management. 

Assessment of whether contractual cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest 
For the purposes of this assessment, ‘principal’ is defined as the fair value of the financial asset on initial recognition. ‘Interest’ is 
defined as consideration for the time value of money and for the credit risk associated with the principal amount outstanding during a 
particular period of time and for other basic lending risks and costs (e.g. liquidity risk and administrative costs), as well as profit margin. 
In assessing whether the contractual cash flows are SPPI, the Group considers the contractual terms of the instrument. This includes 
assessing whether the financial asset contains a contractual term that could change the timing or amount of contractual cash flows 
such that it would not meet this condition. 

Reclassifications 
Financial assets are not reclassified subsequent to their initial recognition, except in the period after the Group changes its business 
model for managing financial assets. 

Financial liabilities  
The Group classifies its financial liabilities, other than financial guarantees and loan commitments, as measured at amortised cost. 

iii. Derecognition 
Financial assets 
The Group derecognises a financial asset when the contractual rights to the cash flows from the financial asset expire, or when it 
transfers the rights to receive the contractual cash flows in a transaction in which substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership 
of the financial asset are transferred or in which the Group neither transfers nor retains substantially all of the risks and rewards of 
ownership and it does not retain control of the financial asset. 

Page | 78  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

39.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities (continued) 
iii. Derecognition (continued) 
Financial assets (continued) 
On derecognition of a financial asset, the difference between the carrying amount of the asset (or the carrying amount allocated to 
the portion of the asset derecognised) and the sum of (i) the consideration received (including any new asset obtained less any new 
liability assumed) and (ii) any cumulative gain or loss that had been recognised in OCI is recognised in profit or loss. 

Financial liabilities 
The Group derecognises a financial liability when its contractual obligations are discharged or cancelled, or expire. 

iv. Modifications of financial assets and financial liabilities 
Financial assets  
If the terms of a financial asset are modified, then the Group evaluates whether the cash flows of the modified asset are substantially 
different.  

If the cash flows are substantially different, the contractual rights to cash flows from the original financial asset are deemed to have 
expired. In this case, the original financial asset is derecognised and a new financial asset is recognised at fair value plus any eligible 
transaction costs. 

If the cash flows are modified when the borrower is in financial difficulties, then the objective of the modification is usually to maximise 
recovery of the original contractual terms rather than to originate a new asset with substantially different terms. If the Group plans to 
modify a financial asset in a way that would result in forgiveness of cash flows, then it first considers whether a portion of the asset 
should be written off before the modification takes place. This approach impacts the result of the quantitative evaluation and means 
that the derecognition criteria are not usually met in such cases. 

If the modification of a financial asset measured at amortised cost or FVOCI does not result in derecognition of the financial asset, 
then the Group first recalculates the gross carrying amount of the financial asset using the original effective interest rate of the asset 
and recognises the resulting adjustment as a modification gain or loss in profit or loss. Any costs or fees incurred and fees received 
as part of the modification adjust the gross carrying amount of the modified financial asset and are amortised over the remaining term 
of the modified financial asset. If such modification is carried out because of financial difficulties of the borrower, then the gain or loss 
is presented together with impairment losses. In other cases, it is presented as interest income calculated using the effective interest 
rate method. 

Financial liabilities 
The Group derecognises a financial liability when its terms are modified and the cash flows of the modified liability are substantially 
different. In this case, a new financial liability based on the modified terms is recognised at fair value. The difference between the 
carrying  amount  of  the  financial  liability  derecognised  and  consideration  paid  is  recognised  in  profit  or  loss.  Consideration  paid 
includes non-financial assets transferred, if any, and the assumption of liabilities, including the new modified financial liability. 

If the modification of a financial liability is not accounted for as derecognition, then the amortised cost of the liability is recalculated by 
discounting the modified cash flows at the original effective interest rate and the resulting gain or losses recognised in profit or loss. 
Any costs and fee incurred are recognised as an adjustment of the carrying amount of the liability and amortised over the remaining 
term of the modified financial liability by re-computing the effective interest rate on the instrument. 

v. Offsetting 
Financial assets and financial liabilities are offset and the net amount presented in the statement of financial position when, and only 
when, the Group currently has a legally enforceable right to set off the amounts and it intends either to settle them on a net basis or 
to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. 

Income and expenses are presented on a net basis only when permitted under IFRS, or for gains and losses arising from a group of 
similar transactions such as in the Group’s trading activity. 

vi. Fair value measurement 
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market 
participants at the measurement date in the principal or, in its absence, the most advantageous market to which the Group has access 
at the date. The fair value of a liability reflects its non-performance risk. 

The  Group  recognises  transfers  between  levels  of  the  fair  value  hierarchy as  of  the  end of  the  reporting period  during which  the 
change has occurred. 

Page | 79  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

39.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities (continued) 
vi. Fair value measurement (continued) 
The Group measures fair values using the following fair value hierarchy, which reflects the significance of the inputs used in making 
the measurements:  
  Level 1: inputs that are quoted market prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical instruments; 
  Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. 
derived  from  prices).  This  category  includes  instruments  valued  using:  quoted  market  prices  in  active  markets  for  similar 
instruments; quoted prices for identical or similar instruments in markets that are considered less than active; or other valuation 
techniques in which all significant inputs are directly or indirectly observable from market data; and 

  Level 3: inputs that are unobservable. This category includes all instruments for which the valuation technique includes inputs not 
based  on  observable  data  and  the  unobservable  inputs  have  a  significant  effect  on  the  instrument’s  valuation.  This  category 
includes instruments that are valued based on quoted prices for similar instruments for which significant unobservable adjustments 
or assumptions are required to reflect differences between the instruments. 

The fair values of financial assets and financial liabilities that are traded in active markets are based on quoted market prices or dealer 
price quotations. For all other financial instruments, the Group determines fair values using other valuation techniques. 

For financial instruments that trade infrequently and have little price transparency, fair value is less objective, and requires varying 
degrees  of  judgement  depending  on  liquidity,  concentration,  uncertainty  of  market  factors,  pricing  assumptions  and  other  risks 
affecting the specific instrument.  

vii. Impairment 
A financial instrument that is not credit-impaired on initial recognition is classified in ‘Stage 1’ and has its credit risk continuously monitored by 
the Group.   

If a SICR since initial recognition is identified, the financial instrument is moved to ‘Stage 2’ but is not yet deemed to be credit-impaired.  

  An SICR is always deemed to occur when the borrower is 30 days past due on its contractual payments.  If the Group becomes 
aware ahead of this time of non-compliance or financial difficulties of the borrower, such as loss of employment, avoiding contact 
with the Group then an SICR has also deemed to occur; and  

  A  receivable  is  always  deemed  to  be  in default  and credit-impaired  when the  borrower  is  90 days  past  due  on  its  contractual 
payments or earlier if the Group becomes aware of severe financial difficulties such as bankruptcy, individual voluntary arragement, 
abscond or disappearance, fraudulent activity and other similar events.  

If the financial instrument is credit-impaired, the financial instrument is then moved to ‘Stage 3’. Financial instruments in Stage 3 have 
their ECL measured based on expected credit losses on an undiscounted lifetime basis. 

The Group measures loss allowances at an amount equal to lifetime ECL, except for debt investment securities that are determined 
to have low credit risk at the reporting date for which they are measured as a 12-month ECL. Loss allowances for lease receivables 
are always measured at an amount equal to lifetime ECL. 

12-month ECL are the portion of ECL that result from default events on a financial instrument that are possible within the 12 months 
after  the  reporting  date.  Financial  instruments  for  which  a  12-month  ECL  is  recognised  are  referred  to  as  ‘Stage  1  financial 
instruments’. 

Lifetime  ECL  are  the  ECL  that  result  from  all  possible  default  events  over  the  expected  life  of  a  financial  instrument.  Financial 
instruments for which a lifetime ECL is recognised but which are not credit-impaired are referred to as ‘Stage 2 financial instruments’. 

Page | 80  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

39.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities (continued) 
vii. Impairment (continued) 

Measurement of ECL 
After a detailed review, the Group devised and implemented an impairment methodology in light of the IFRS 9 requirements outlined 
above noting the following: 

  The  ECL  was  derived  by  reviewing  the  Group’s  loss  rate  and  loss  given  default  over  the  past  8  years  by  product  and 

geographical segment; 

  The Group has assumed that the future economic conditions will broadly mirror the current environment and therefore the 

forecasted loss levels in the next 3 years will match the Group’s experience in recent years; 

  For  portfolios  where  the  Group  has  never had  a  default  in  its  history  or  has  robust  credit  enhancements  such  as  credit 
insurance or default indemnities for the entire portfolio, then no IFRS 9 provision is made.  At 2020 year-end, 36.6% had 
such credit enhancements (2019: 37.9%); and 
If the Group holds objective evidence through specifically assessing a credit-impaired receivable and believes it will go on 
to  completely recover the debt  due  to the collateral held  and cooperation with  the  borrower, then  no IFRS 9 provision  is 
made. 

 

ECL are probability-weighted estimates of credit losses. They are measured as follows: 

  Financial assets  that are not credit-impaired at  the reporting date: as the present value  of  all cash shortfalls  (i.e. the  difference 
between the cash flows due to the entity in accordance with the contract and the cash flows that the Group expects to receive); 
  Financial assets that are credit-impaired at the reporting date: as the difference between the gross carrying amount and the present 

value of estimated future cash flows; and 

  Undrawn loan commitments: as the present value of the difference between the contractual cash flows that are due to the Group if 

the commitment is drawn down and the cash flows that the Group expects to receive. 

Credit-impaired financial assets 
At each reporting date, the Group assesses whether financial assets carried at amortised cost and debt financial assets carried at 
FVOCI, and finance lease receivables are credit-impaired (referred to as ‘Stage 3 financial assets’). A financial asset is credit-impaired 
when one or more events that have a detrimental impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset have occurred. 

Evidence that a financial asset is credit-impaired includes the following observable date: 

  Significant financial difficulty of the borrower or issuer; 
  A breach of contract such as a default or past due event; 
  The restructuring of a loan or advance by the Group on terms that the Group would not consider otherwise; 
 
  The disappearance of an active market for a security because of financial difficulties. 

It is becoming probable that the borrower will enter bankruptcy or other financial reorganisation; or 

A loan that has been renegotiated due to a deterioration in the borrower’s condition is usually considered to be credit-impaired unless 
there is evidence that the risk of not receiving contractual cash flows has reduced significantly and there are no other indicators of 
impairment.  In  addition,  a  retail  loan  that  is overdue  for  90 days  or more  is considered  credit-impaired even  when the  regulatory 
definition of default is different. 

In making an assessment of whether an investment in sovereign debt is credit impaired, the Group considers the following factors: 

  The market’s assessment of creditworthiness as reflected in the bond yields; 
  The rating agencies’ assessments of creditworthiness; 
  The country’s ability to access the capital markets for new debt issuance; 
  The  probability  of  debt  being  restructured,  resulting  in  holders  suffering  losses  through  voluntary  or  mandatory  debt 

forgiveness; and 

  The international support mechanisms in place to provide the necessary support as ‘lender of last resort’ to that country, as 
well as the intention, reflected in public statements, of governments and agencies to use those mechanisms. This includes 
an assessment of the depth of those mechanisms and, irrespective of the political intent, whether there is the capacity to 
fulfil the required criteria. 

Presentation of allowance for ECL in the statement of financial position 
Loss allowances for ECL are presented in the statement of financial position as follows: 

  Financial assets measured at amortised cost: as a deduction from the gross carrying amount of the assets; 
  Loan commitments: generally, as a provision; and 
  Debt instruments measured at FVOCI: no loss allowance is recognised in the statement of financial position because the 
carrying amount of these assets is their fair value. However, the loss allowance is disclosed and is recognised in the fair 
value reserve. 

Page | 81  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

40.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

G. Financial assets and financial liabilities (continued) 
vii. Impairment (continued) 

Write-off 
Loans and debt securities are written off (either partially or in full) when there is no reasonable expectation of recovering a financial 
asset in its entirety or a portion thereof. This is generally the case when the Group determines that the borrower does not have assets 
or sources of income that could generate sufficient cash flows to repay the amounts subject to the write-off. This assessment is carried 
out at the individual asset level. 

Recoveries of amounts previously written off are included in ‘impairment losses on financial instruments’ in the statement of profit or 
loss and OCI. 

Financial assets that are written off could still be subject to enforcement activities in order to comply with the Group’s procedures for 
recovery of amounts due. 

H. Cash and cash equivalents 
For  the purpose  of  the  statement of  cash flows,  cash  and cash  equivalents comprise  cash  and  deposit balances  with  an  original 
maturity date of three months or less.  

I. Loans and advances 
Loans and advances’ captions in the statement of financial position include: 

  Loans and advances measured at amortised cost (see 36  (I)). They are initially measured at  fair value plus  incremental 

direct transaction costs, and subsequently at their amortised cost using the effective interest method; and 

  Finance lease receivables (see 36 (G)). 

J. Property, plant and equipment  
Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at historical cost less accumulated depreciation (see below). Historical cost includes 
expenditure that is directly attributable to the acquisition of the items.  

The assets’ residual values and useful economic lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each reporting date. An asset’s 
carrying amount is written down immediately to its recoverable amount if the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its estimated 
recoverable amount.  

When parts of an item of property, plant and equipment have different useful lives, those components are accounted for as separate 
items of property, plant and equipment.  

Depreciation and amortisation 
Assets are depreciated or amortised on a straight-line basis, so as to write off the book value over their estimated useful lives.  The 
estimated useful lives of property, plant and equipment and intangibles are as follows: 

Property, plant and equipment 
Leasehold improvements 
IT equipment 
Motor vehicles 
Furniture and equipment 
Plant and machinery 

to expiration of the lease 
4-5 years 
2.5 years 
4 -10 years 
5 – 20 years 

K. Intangible assets and goodwill 
i. Goodwill  
Goodwill that arises on the acquisition of subsidiaries is measured at cost less accumulated impairment losses. 

Page | 82  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

39.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

K. Intangible assets and goodwill (continued) 
ii. Software 
Software acquired by the Group is measured at cost less accumulated amortisation and any accumulated impairment losses.  

Expenditure on internally developed software is recognised as an asset when the Group is able to demonstrate: that the product is 
technically feasible, its intention and ability to complete the development and use the software in a manner that will generate future 
economic  benefits,  and  that  it  can  reliably  measure  the  costs  to  complete  the  development.  The  capitalised  costs  of  internally 
developed  software  include  all  costs  directly  attributable  to  developing  the  software  and  capitalised  borrowing  costs,  and  are 
amortised  over  its  useful  life.  Internally  developed  software  is  stated  at  capitalised  cost  less  accumulated  amortisation  and  any 
accumulated impairment losses. 

Software is amortised on a straight-line basis in profit or loss over its estimated useful life, from the date on which it is available for 
use.  Amortisation methods, useful lives and residual values are reviewed at each reporting date and adjusted if appropriate. 

iii. Other 
Intangible assets that are acquired by an entity and having finite useful lives are measured at cost less accumulated amortisation and 
any accumulated impairment losses.  

Intangible  assets acquired  as part  of  a  business combination,  with an  indefinite  useful  live  are  measured at  fair  value. Intangible 
assets with indefinite useful lives are not amortised but instead are subject to impairment testing at least annually.  

The useful lives of intangibles are as follows:  

Customer contracts and lists 
Business intellectual property rights 
Website development costs 
Software 

to expiration of the agreement 
4 years - indefinite 
indefinite 
5 years 

L. Impairment of non-financial assets 
At  each  reporting  date,  the  Group  reviews  the  carrying  amounts  of  its  non-financial  assets  (other  than  deferred  tax  assets)  to 
determine whether there is any indication of impairment. If any such indication exists, the asset’s recoverable amount is estimated. 
Goodwill is tested annually for impairment. 

For impairment testing, assets are grouped together into the smallest group of assets that generates cash inflows from continuing 
use  that  is  largely  independent  of  the  cash  inflows  of  other  assets  or  Cash  Generating  Units  (“CGUs”).  Goodwill  arising  from  a 
business combination is allocated to CGUs or groups of CGUs that are expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination. 

The recoverable amount of an asset or CGU is the greater of its value in use and its fair value less cost to sell. Value in use is based 
on  the  estimated  future  cash  flows,  discounted  to  their  present  value  using  a  pre-tax  discount  rate  that  reflects  current  market 
assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset or CGU. 

An impairment loss is recognised if the carrying amount of an asset or CGU exceeds its recoverable amount. 

The Group’s corporate assets do not generate separate cash inflows and are used by more than one CGU. Corporate assets are 
allocated to CGUs on a reasonable and consistent basis and tested for impairment as part of the testing of the CGUs to which the 
corporate assets are located. 

Impairment losses are recognised in profit or loss. They are allocated first to reduce the carrying amount of any goodwill allocated to 
the CGU, and then to reduce the carrying amounts of the other assets in the CGU on a pro rata basis. 

An impairment loss in respect of goodwill is not reversed. For other assets, an impairment loss is reversed only to the extent that the 
asset’s carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined, net of depreciation or amortisation, 
if no impairment loss had been recognised. 

Page | 83  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

39.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

M. Deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities 
Deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities are the Group’s sources of debt funding. 

The  Group  classifies  capital  instruments  as  financial  liabilities  or  equity  instruments  in  accordance  with  the  substance  of  the 
contractual terms of the instruments.  

Deposits, debt securities issued and subordinated liabilities are initially measured at fair value minus incremental direct transaction 
costs, and subsequently measured at their amortised cost using the effective interest method. 

N. Employee benefits 
i. Long-term employee benefits 
Pension obligations 
The Group has pension obligations arising from both defined benefit and defined contribution pension plans.  

A defined contribution pension plan is one under which the Group pays fixed contributions into a separate fund and has no legal or 
constructive  obligations  to  pay  further  contributions.  Defined  benefit  pension  plans  define  an  amount  of  pension  benefit  that  an 
employee will receive on retirement, usually dependent on one or more factors such as age, years of service and remuneration.  

Under the defined benefit pension plan, in accordance with IAS 19 Employee benefits, the full service cost for the period, adjusted for 
any changes to the plan, is charged to the income statement. A charge equal to the expected increase in the present value of the 
plan liabilities, as a result of the plan liabilities being one year closer to settlement, and a credit reflecting the long-term expected 
return on assets based on the market value of the scheme assets at the beginning of the period, is included in the income statement. 

The statement of financial position records as an asset or liability as appropriate, the difference between the market value of the plan 
assets and the present value of the accrued plan liabilities. The difference between the expected return on assets and that achieved 
in the period, is recognised in the income statement in the year in which they arise. The defined benefit pension plan obligation is 
calculated by independent actuaries using the projected unit credit method and a discount rate based on the yield on high quality 
rated corporate bonds.   

The Group’s defined contribution pension obligations arise from contributions paid to a Group personal pension plan, an ex gratia 
pension plan, employee personal pension plans and employee co-operative insurance plans. For these pension plans, the amounts 
charged to the income statement represent the contributions payable during the year.  

ii. Share-based compensation 
The Group maintains a share option programme which allows certain Group employees to acquire shares of the Group. The change 
in the fair value of options granted is recognised as an employee expense with a corresponding change in equity. The fair value of 
the options is measured at grant date and spread over the period during which the employees become unconditionally entitled to the 
options.  

At each reporting date, the Group revises its estimate of the number of options that are expected to vest and recognises the impact 
of the revision to original estimates, if any, in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.  

The  fair  value is estimated  using  a  proprietary  binomial  probability  model. The proceeds received,  net  of  any  directly  attributable 
transaction costs, are credited to share capital (nominal value) and share premium when the options are exercised.  

O. Share capital and reserves 
Share issue costs 
Incremental costs that are directly attributable to the issue of an equity instrument are deducted from the initial measurement of the 
equity instruments. 

P. Earnings per share (“EPS”) 
The Group presents basic and diluted EPS data for its ordinary shares. Basic EPS is calculated by dividing the profit or loss that is 
attributable  to  ordinary  shareholders  of  MFG  by  the  weighted-average  number  of  ordinary  shares  outstanding  during  the  period. 
Diluted EPS is determined by adjusting profit or loss that is attributable to ordinary shareholders and the weighted-average number 
of  ordinary  shares  outstanding  for  the  effects  of  all  dilutive  potential  ordinary  shares,  which  comprise  share  options  granted 
employees. 

Page | 84  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
For the year ended 31 December 2020 

39.  Significant accounting policies (continued) 

Q. Segmental reporting 
A segment is a distinguishable component of the Group that is engaged either in providing products or services (business segment), 
or in providing products or services within a particular economic environment (geographical segment), which is subject to risks and 
rewards that are different from those of other segments. The Group’s primary format for segmental reporting is based on business 
segments.  

An operating segment is a component of the Group that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur 
expenses, including revenues and expenses relating to transactions with  any  of the Group’s other components,  whose operating 
results are regularly reviewed by the Group’s chief  operating decision maker (“CODM”) to make decisions about resources to be 
allocated to the segment and assess its performance, and for which discrete financial information is available. 

Segment results reported to the Group’s CEO (being the CODM) include items that are directly attributable to a segment as well as 
those that can be allocated on a reasonable basis. 

Page | 85  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

SHAREHOLDER NOTES 

Page | 86  

 
 
 
Clarendon House 
Victoria Street 
Douglas 
Isle of Man 
IM1 2LN 

Tel: (01624) 694694 
Fax: (01624) 624278 

www.mfg.im